ALC9200N - Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
A3 Color Laser Printer
EPSON AcuLaser C9200N
Confidential
SEPG08001
Notice:
The purpose of this manual is to provide the product knowledge and the technical information required for repair or maintenance of EPSON AcuLaser M2000D/M2000DN/
M2010D/M2010DN.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
This manual contains confidential information and sensitive matters, special care should be taken when handling the manual.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the products performance and functions.
Some of the descriptions or the appearance of some parts in this manual may differ from those on an actual product.
Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2008.

Imaging Products CS, PL & Environmental Management
Confidential
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
Manual Configuration condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss
of life.
This manual consists of the following seven chapters:

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
Describes the main features, basic specifications, consumable products, of life.
periodic replacement parts, and controller interface of the product.
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
Describes each mechanism configurations and explains fundamental condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal
operating principle of major components including the control system. injury or may cause damage to, or destruction of equipment.
CHAPTER 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the troubleshooting procedures that can help you diagnose and
resolve problems. The problems are sorted by displayed error codes and Indicates a prohibited action during maintenance work.
phenomena of abnormal image output.
CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
of the product. Indicates a mandatory action during maintenance work.
CHAPTER 5 ADJUSTMENT
Describes the settings and the adjustments to be performed during the
maintenance work.
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE
C H E C K Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
Describes preventive maintenance procedures.
P O IN T condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently.
CHAPTER 7 APPENDIX Provides additional information that is related to a specific
Provides the additional information such as panel operations, connector subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous
pin layouts, parts list, and exploded diagrams for reference. action.
Indicates a product reassembly procedure, practice or condition
that must be executed in accordance with the specified standards to
maintain the products quality.
Symbols Used in this Manual Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D condition that must be executed in accordance with the specified
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a standards to maintain the products quality.
procedure or an action. Be sure to read and understand the information with these
symbols.
Confidential
Location of Safety Equipment
Safety
Safety-related Symbols
Right Door SW

condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss
of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or Front Door SW

condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
of life.

condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal
injury or may cause damage to, or destruction of equipment.
Front Door SW
Safety System Wiring Schematic
Safety Equipment Main Power Switch Sleep Relay Heater Relay
1
Never deactivate the safety equipment installed on the product for
any reason whatsoever. (e.g. Making a connection circuit bypasses 2
Front Door SW
the safety equipment.) Main DC Power 24V /Right Door SW
Supply
3
List of Safety Equipment
3.3V
Power supply to board
Name Function/Purpose
Sub DC Power
Interlock switch (Front Door Shuts off 24 V DC power line when the Front Door or Right Door Supply 4
Front Door SW
SW/Right Door SW) is opened.
5V 5
Interlock switch (Front Door Shuts off 5V/3.3V DC power line when the Front Door is opened.
SW) 4039T2C133AA
Confidential
Laser Beam
Laser Opening Location
Laser Openings
Handling Precautions
Disassembling and adjustment procedures not specified herein

may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not disassemble or attempt to adjust the PH unit for any
reason whatsoever. When the PH unit malfunctions, replace it
with a new one.
Confidential
Prohibited Matters
Never deactivate the safety equipment installed on the product for any reason
whatsoever. Connect the printer to an electrical outlet that matches the printers
rated voltage and power requirements.
Never modify the safety equipment or replace it with part not approved by
EPSON. Doing so may cause the safety functions to stop working properly, and
may result in fire or injury.
Never modify the product. If you are instructed to do so, however, fully Do not connect any other devices to the electrical outlet supplying
understand the instruction and perform the modification. the printer. Doing so can cause overloading of the electrical circuit
and may cause a fire.
Do not use extension cords or power adapters to plug multiple

devices into the same outlet. Power plug and electrical outlet should
To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn the be free from dust or foreign objects.
printer off and unplug the power cord before starting maintenance
work. When the power supply cable must be connected to measure
voltage or for any other task, strictly follow the instructions and use The printer should be properly grounded to prevent electric shock.
extreme caution in working on electronic components. The grounding terminal should be one of the followings:
a. One of the electrical outlet
Pay particular attention to the high-voltage part indicated with the
b. One that is grounded by a D-type grounding construction.
symbol on the left.
(The former third-type grounding construction; grounding
resistance under 100 ).
Power cord should not be deformed or damaged. If the cord is
Do not touch the high temperature parts indicated with the symbol damaged, replace it with a new one dedicated for the product.
on the left. Those parts are extremely hot immediately after use. If
you need to replace those parts, leave the printer until it cools.
After replacing the Fuser Unit or any other parts to which AC

Use the specified service parts for repair and maintenance. voltage is applied, be sure to check the part is properly installed and
the connecting cables are not caught between metal parts.
Otherwise a fire or an electric shock may occur.
Fuse on the Power Supply Unit must not be replaced under any
When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for circumstances.
cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products
containing flammable gas is prohibited.
Confidential
Before performing repair and maintenance work, read and Do not use vacuum cleaner for home use to clean up spills of
understand the documents of the product (e.g. service manual). powdered toners. The very fine particles can cause fire/explosion.
Be sure to follow the specified steps and use the prescribed tools Sweep them thoroughly with a broom or wipe them with a cloth
described in the documents. moistened with neutral detergent. If a large amount of toner is
spilled, use a toner vacuum designed specifically to clean toner.
When disassembling or assembling the product, make sure to wear
Ozone gas is generated by the printer as a by-product of the
gloves to avoid injury from metal parts with sharp edges.
printing process. The amount of gas is too small to be harmful,
however, some users may feel uncomfortable under the following
conditions. It is desirable to advice the users to ventilate the room
Take care not to drop any screws, washers, or clips inside the when using the printer.
printer body. Should it fall in, do not boot up your printer until the When using the printer for a long period of time in a room with
part has been safely removed. poor ventilation.
When printing a large amount of documents at a time.
When using multiple printers in the same room.
After reassembling the printer, make sure all the parts and the
screws are put back in place and the cables are not caught between In order to protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use
metal parts. static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when
accessing internal components.
Though toner and developer are safe for human body, they may
cause irritation to skin and eyes. If toner gets into your eyes, wash it Do not use thinner or alcohol when cleaning the product as it may
away immediately with water. If irritation continues, see a physician. result in discoloration or deformation.
If toner gets in your mouth, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
If swallowed, induce vomiting and consult a physician.
Do not throw used toner cartridges or toner into the flames. Make sure an antivirus software is installed on the computer used
for service support. Be sure to have the latest virus definition file for
the software.
Confidential
Revision History
This manual is revised when the system, component, or part of the product is modified as a result of continuing improvements to the products performance and functions.
See the table below for recent updates.
Revision Date of Issue Description

A July 25, 2008 First Release
B October 14, 2008 Revision:
Chapter 2
2.2.2 Parts layout drawing: revised the contents partially.
Chapter 3
Table 3-17 Error Code List: revised the contents partially.
Revised E555.
Chapter 5
Table 5-3 Update method for Firmware: revised the contents.
Chapter 7
In 7.2 Wiring Diagram: added connector CNDM3.
7.5.5 Maintenance Status Sheet: revised the contents partially.
C May 17, 2010 Revision:
Chapter 1
1.2.1 Error Message and Troubleshooting was added.
1.2.2 Warning Message and Troubleshooting was added.
Chapter 3
3.3.4 Other Errors was added.
Chapter 4
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M): revised the assembling directions partially.
D September 8, 2010 Revision:
Chapter 3
3.3.2 Solution to Engine-Related Error revised the contents partially. (E553)
Chapter 7
7.6 Exploded Diagram / Parts List: revised the contents partially.
Confidential
Contents
Chapter 1PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4.1 Fan Control.............................................................................................. 94
2.4.2 Engine Section Parts Operated When the Main Power Switch is Turned ON
1.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................ 12 95
1.1.1 Basic Specifications................................................................................. 12
1.1.2 Paper Specifications ................................................................................ 17
1.1.3 Replacement Parts ................................................................................... 20 Chapter 3Troubleshooting
1.1.4 Controller Specifications ......................................................................... 21 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 97
1.2 List of Printer Messages ..................................................................................... 22 3.1.1 Procedure Outline for Troubleshooting................................................... 97
1.2.1 Error Message and Troubleshooting ....................................................... 25 3.1.2 Preliminary Check ................................................................................... 97
1.2.2 Warning Message and Troubleshooting .................................................. 28 3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work ................................. 98
3.1.4 Troubleshooting Flowchart ..................................................................... 98
Chapter 2OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3.2 Jam Display ........................................................................................................ 99
3.2.1 Checking a paper jam type and jammed location.................................... 99
2.1 Print Process ....................................................................................................... 32 3.2.2 Sensor layout ......................................................................................... 101
2.2 Operating Principle of Main Unit Mechanism ................................................... 33 3.2.3 Solution ................................................................................................. 102
2.2.1 Center cross section ................................................................................. 33 3.3 Service Call Error............................................................................................. 107
2.2.2 Parts layout drawing ................................................................................ 35 3.3.1 Error code .............................................................................................. 107
2.2.3 PH Unit .................................................................................................... 38 3.3.2 Solution to Engine-Related Error .......................................................... 113
2.2.4 Photoconductor Unit section (PU section) .............................................. 41 3.3.3 Controller Related Error ........................................................................ 129
2.2.5 Photo Conductor section.......................................................................... 43 3.3.4 Other Errors ........................................................................................... 131
2.2.6 Charge Corona section ............................................................................ 44 3.4 Power supply trouble........................................................................................ 134
2.2.7 Developing section .................................................................................. 46 3.4.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check)......................... 134
2.2.8 Toner Supply section ............................................................................... 51 3.4.2 Control panel indicators do not light ..................................................... 134
2.2.9 Transfer Corona section .......................................................................... 54 3.4.3 Fusing Heaters do not operate ............................................................... 135
2.2.10 Toner Collecting section........................................................................ 63 3.4.4 Power is not supplied to option ............................................................. 135
2.2.11 Paper feed section (Standard Cassette).................................................. 66
3.5 Image quality problem...................................................................................... 136
2.2.12 Bypass section (MP tray)....................................................................... 69
3.5.1 Initial Check Items ................................................................................ 136
2.2.13 Registration Roller section .................................................................... 72
3.5.2 Image Trouble List ................................................................................ 136
2.2.14 Fusing section ........................................................................................ 74
3.5.3 Solution ................................................................................................. 139
2.2.15 Paper exit section................................................................................... 81
2.2.16 Image stabilization control .................................................................... 82
2.2.17 Life management ................................................................................... 83 Chapter 4DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2.3 Operating principle of Option mechanism ......................................................... 85 4.1 Preliminary Check............................................................................................ 157
2.3.1 Optional Cassette..................................................................................... 85 4.1.1 Tool List ................................................................................................ 157
2.3.2 Duplex Unit ............................................................................................. 89 4.1.2 Parts/Units that Should Not be Disassembled ....................................... 157
2.4 Other Control...................................................................................................... 94 4.1.3 How to Read this Chapter .................................................................... 158
Confidential
4.2 List of Disassembly/Reassembly Parts/Units................................................... 160 7.4.2 Special Menu ......................................................................................... 349
4.3 Main Unit Disassembly/Reassembly................................................................ 162 7.5 Information Sheet ............................................................................................. 352
4.3.1 Group 1 .................................................................................................. 162 7.5.1 Configuration Status Sheet .................................................................... 352
4.3.2 Group 2 .................................................................................................. 169 7.5.2 Supplies Status Sheet............................................................................. 353
4.3.3 Group 3 .................................................................................................. 175 7.5.3 Usage History Sheet .............................................................................. 354
4.3.4 Group 4 .................................................................................................. 193 7.5.4 Support Status Sheet.............................................................................. 355
4.3.5 Group 5 .................................................................................................. 198 7.5.5 Maintenance Status Sheet...................................................................... 356
4.3.6 Group 6 .................................................................................................. 206 7.5.6 Error Log Sheet ..................................................................................... 363
4.3.7 Group 7 .................................................................................................. 210 7.6 Exploded Diagram / Parts List ......................................................................... 364
4.3.8 Group 8 .................................................................................................. 221
4.3.9 Group 9 .................................................................................................. 226
4.3.10 Group 10 .............................................................................................. 230
4.3.11 Group 11 .............................................................................................. 246
4.3.12 Group 12 .............................................................................................. 260
4.3.13 Group 13 .............................................................................................. 271
4.3.14 Group 14 .............................................................................................. 275
4.3.15 Group 15 .............................................................................................. 279
4.3.16 Group 16 .............................................................................................. 286
4.3.17 Group 17 .............................................................................................. 291
4.4 Others ............................................................................................................... 297
Chapter 5ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Adjustment Item ............................................................................................... 314
5.2 Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 315
5.2.1 Skew Adjustment................................................................................... 315
5.2.2 MP Tray Mechanical Adjustment ......................................................... 316
5.2.3 Reset Life Counter................................................................................. 317
5.2.4 Writing USB ID..................................................................................... 318
5.3 Firmware Update .............................................................................................. 320
Chapter 6MAINTENANCE
6.1 Cleaning............................................................................................................ 332
Chapter 7APPENDIX
7.1 Connection Diagram......................................................................................... 338
7.2 Wiring Diagram................................................................................................ 339
7.3 Connector Layout Drawing .............................................................................. 346
7.4 Control Panel Special Operations..................................................................... 347
7.4.1 Operation Method & Functions............................................................. 347
Confidential
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Confidential
EPSON AcuLaser C9200N Revision D
1.1 Product Specifications Item Specification

Noise Printing 52 dB
AcuLaser C9200N is a PDL model of a color page printer utilizing laser and Standby 40 dB
electrophotographic technologies.
Storage and Temperature and Temperature: 0 ~ 35 C
transportation humidity Humidity: 30 ~ 85 % RH*5
1.1.1 Basic Specifications conditions
*1 : Conditions: A4, plain paper, continuous printing

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
The values vary depending on paper type and size.
Item Specification *2 : Less than 109 seconds from sleep mode. (120 V)
Resolution 600 dpi Less than 109 seconds from sleep mode. (230 V)
Print speed*1 Color 25.6 ppm / 23.8 ppm *3 : Paper feeder = MP tray, Standard Cassette or Optional Cassette 1
(Single-sided / Duplex) Monochrome Paper size = A4
25.6 ppm / 23.8 ppm
*4 : A4, continuous printing, independent of color/monochrome ratio.
Warm-up time 23C, 55% RH Less than 109 seconds*2 (120 V)
*5 : No condensation
Less than 109 seconds*2 (230 V)
First Print Out*3 Color 11.4 seconds
OPTIONAL UNIT
Monochrome 8.1 seconds
Optional Capacity: Up to 500 sheets
Dimensions (W x D x H) 648 mm x 608 mm x 477 mm
cassette Paper size: A3, A4, B4, B5, Letter, LGL, B, F4
Weight (excluded consumables) 49.5 kg
Duplex Unit Paper size: A3F, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Letter, LGL, B, GLG, GLT, EXE,
Power supply AC 110 ~ 120 V: 50 Hz / 60 Hz 3 Hz F4, Double postal card, 4-sided postal card
AC 220 ~ 440 V: 50 Hz / 60 Hz 3 Hz
Power consumption Max. 110 ~ 120 V: Less than 1340 W
220 ~ 240 V: Less than 1390 W
Color printing 110 ~ 120 V: 581 W
220 ~ 240 V: 576 W
Monochrome printing 110 ~ 120 V: 543 W
220 ~ 240 V: 522 W
Ready (Heater ON) 110 ~ 120 V: 139 W
(Average) 220 ~ 240 V: 146 W
Sleep Less than 11 W
Stand by 0W
Life*4 600,000 pages or five years, whichever
comes first
Durability Average: 4,000 pages / month
Max: 10,000 pages / month
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 12

Confidential
EXTERNAL VIEW AND PART NAMES

Table 1-1. Part Names Table 1-2. Part Names
No. Name No. Name No. Name No. Name
1 Control Panel 6 MP Tray 1 Exhaust filter 5 AC inlet
2 Output Tray 7 Paper Indicator 2 Left side cover 6 Service connector
3 Cover B 8 Standard Cassette 3 Type-B interface card slot cover 7 Parallel interface connector
4 Odor filter 9 Cover F (Front Door) 4 Ethernet interface connector 8 USB interface connector
5 Cover A (Right Door)
1
1 2 3
2
4 8
7
9 5
6
3
8
6 5 4
Figure 1-2. Rear view
7
Figure 1-1. Front view

Confidential
Table 1-3. Part Names

No. Name No. Name No. Name
1 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) 6 Photoconductor unit (Black) 11 Power switch
2 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) 7 Photoconductor unit (Cyan) 12 Cover H
3 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) 8 Photoconductor unit (Magenta) 13 Paper path G
4 Toner Cartridge (Black) 9 Photoconductor unit (Yellow)
5 Exposure window cleaning bar 10 Waste toner collector
1 2 3 4
12
5
13
11
10 6
9 7
8
Figure 1-3. Inside the printer

Confidential
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
The following figure shows the dimensions and weight of the printer.
NOTE 1 : Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.

2 : Consumables are not included in the weight of the main unit.
477 mm
Main Unit 49.5 kg
648 mm 608 mm
Figure 1-4. Main Unit
937 mm
849 mm
725 mm
601 mm
477 mm
Optional Cassette 14.8 kg

Main Unit + Optional Cassette 1 level 64.3 kg
2 levels 79.1 kg
3 levels 93.9 kg
Main Unit + Duplex Unit 52.8 kg
Main Unit + Optional Cassettes (3 levels) + Printer stand 102.4 kg
699 mm 629 mm
Figure 1-5. Main Unit with Optional Units Installed

Confidential
INSTALLATION SPACE REQUIREMENTS
The following figure shows the dimensions of the space required around the printer.
Be sure to provide the space for installation, operation, and maintenance.
300 mm
200 mm
450 mm
100 mm
820 mm
1125 mm
Figure 1-6. Installation Space Requirements

Confidential
1.1.2 Paper Specifications

SUPPORTED PAPERS
Table 1-4. Supported Papers

Capacity
Paper Feeder Paper Type* Paper Size Weight
(Height)
Standard Standard Cassette Plain paper / Recycled paper A3F, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5 250 sheets 64 ~ 90 g/m2
MP tray Plain paper / Recycled paper A3F, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, LGL, GLG, EXE, B, F4 100 sheets 64 ~ 90 g/m2
Special media Transparency A4, LT 10 sheets ---
Coated Paper A3F, A3, A4 10 sheets ---
Long Paper Width: 210 mm ~ 297 mm
1 sheets 127 ~ 160 g/m2
Length: 458 mm ~ 1,200 mm
Postcard Postcard, Double postal card, 4-sided postal card 10 sheets 190 g/m2
Labels A4, LT 10 sheets 91 ~ 209 g/m2
Thick paper A3F, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, LGL, GLG, EXE, B, F4 10 sheets 91 ~ 256 g/m2
Envelope Monarch, COM-#10, DL, IB5, C5, C6 10 sheets 91 ~ 256 g/m2
User defined Width: 90.00 mm ~ 311.20 mm
--- 64 ~ 256 g/m2
Length: 139.70 mm ~ 1200.00 mm
Option Optional Cassette Plain paper / Recycled paper A3, A4, B4, B5, LT, LGL, B, F4 500 sheets 64 ~ 90 g/m2
Duplex unit Plain paper / Recycled paper / Thick paper A3F, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Letter, LGL, B, GLG, GLT, EXE, F4 --- 64 ~ 256 g/m2
* : Plain Paper: FX-P (64g/m2), Epson color laser paper (82g/m2)

Confidential
UNSUITABLE PAPERS
The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print quality,
paper misfeeds, or damage to the printer may occur.
Specially-treated papers, such as carbon-backed, non-carbon, heat-sensitive,
pressure-sensitive, or acid paper
Extremely thick or extremely thin papers
Damp paper
Art paper, coated paper for color printers
Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with uneven surface
Perforated paper or paper with punched hole
Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)
Label that peels off easily
Papers with glue, staples, or paper clips
Inkjet printer paper (Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper, Glossy Paper, Glossy Film, etc.)
Printouts printed by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
Transparency for other color laser printers or color photocopiers
Printouts printed by another color/monochrome laser printer or a photocopier
Sheets of paper stuck together using glue or the like
Postcards for inkjet printers
Iron-on Transfer Paper (for inkjet printers or laser printers)
Paper that deteriorates or discolors at 200 C or lower
When using illustrated postcards, paper feed rollers may be soiled with paper dust
and these cards may not be fed properly. In this case, clean the rollers with
reference to Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE (p.331)

Confidential
PRINTABLE AREA ENVELOPE ORIENTATION
Maximum print area (Printing is guaranteed) Envelope Size Monarch, COM-#10, DL, C5, C6
Area excluding 4.2 mm margins on all four edges

(For A3F, all areas except 2 mm from the left and right edges) Feeding
Direction
Guaranteed print area
Area excluding 5 mm margins on all four edges

(Values in parenthesis ( ) are for A3F)
POSTCARD ORIENTATION
Postcard Front Postcard Reverse Front side of double postal card
5 mm (7 mm) 5 mm (7 mm) Postcard type side printing side printing Back side of double postal card
Feeding
Direction
5 mm
Front side of 4-sided postal card Back side of 4-sided postal card
Feeding
Direction

5 mm
Table 1-5. Guaranteed Print Area

Confidential
1.1.3 Replacement Parts

CONSUMABLES
Load envelopes on the MP tray with the side to be printed face Name Life
down. Toner Cartridge (K) Included in the initial package 5,000 pages
Before printing on envelopes, set the release lever to envelope
Replacement 21,000 pages
position.
Toner Cartridge (Y/M/C) Included in the initial package 3,500 pages
Do not use envelopes that have a tape or glue.
Replacement 14,000 pages
Photoconductor Unit (K) 50,000 pages
Photoconductor Unit (Y/M/C) 30,000 pages
Waste toner collector 21,000 pages
PAPER EJECT/CAPACITY Odor filter (Included in the K toner cartridge) 15,000 pages
Exhaust fan filter (Included in the waste toner collector) 18,000 pages
Paper eject Capacity Remarks
Face down 500*1 sheets Applicable to simplex printing only. PRODUCTS THAT REQUIRE PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
350*2 sheets
Name Life
*1 : Calculated on FX-P paper (64 g/m2)
Fusing Unit 120,000 pages
*2 : Calculated on EPSON color laser paper (82 g/m2)
Transfer belt unit 120,000 pages
2nd transfer roller (Included in the Transfer belt unit) 120,000 pages
Maintenance Unit (Feed roller for MP tray and Standard cassette) 200,000 pages
Feed roller, Separation roller 200,000 pages

Confidential
1.1.4 Controller Specifications EXTERNAL INTERFACES

Standard USB interface USB 2.0HS Device Interface
BASIC SPECIFICATIONS
Service connector (USB 2.0HS Host Interface)
CPU 32bit RISC CPU
Parallel interface IEEE1284 compliant
Enhanced Technology NPGI, PGI, CRIT, RIT
Ethernet interface 100BaseTX/10BaseT
RAM Standard (on-board) 256 MB
Maximum 768 MB Option Type-B interface ---
Expansion Type DDR333 CL=2.5
(128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB) USB 2.0HS Device Interface
Numbers of slot 1 slot
ROM Type 32-bit width (3.3V) Parallel Interface
Type-B Interface
Program 32 MB (DIMM)
Font Included in the program
Expansion ROM ROM for Adobe PS3 as a standard USB 2.0HS Host Interface
EEPROM Serial type 512 kbit
Control panel 22 digits x 5 lines LCD, three LEDs and seven buttons
Printer language ESC/Page-Color, ESC/Page, FX, ESCP2, I239X,
PCL5c, PCL6, Adobe PostScript3 and PDF1.6
Auxiliary software Configuration Status Sheet
Supplies Status Sheet
Usage History Sheet
Reserve Job List
Form Overlay List
Network Status Sheet
EpsonNet Config (Web) Ethernet Interface
USB Ext I/F Status Sheet (only when connected to
D4 compliant USB devices)
AUX Status Sheet (only when Type-B level 3 is
installed)
PS3 Status Sheet Figure 1-7. External Interfaces
PS3 Font List
ROM A Information (only when optional DIMM
is installed)

Confidential
1.2 List of Printer Messages Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages

Class Printer Status Error LED status
The following table shows the printers LEDs indications in each printer status. Form Feed X
The meanings of the symbols used in the table are as follows.
Printing Configuration Status Sheet X
O: Lights Printing Supplies Status Sheet X
---: Lights or flashes depending on the condition Printing Usage History Sheet X
X: Off ESC/Page Font Sample X

PCL Font Sample X
1: Flashes on and off at intervals of 0.3 seconds
ESCP2 Font Sample X
2: Flashes on and off at intervals of 0.6 seconds
FX Font Sample X
Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages I239X Font Sample X
Class Printer Status Error LED status PS3 Status Sheet printing X
Formatting CF X PS3 Font List X
ROM CHECK X Printing Support Status Sheet X
RAM CHECK X Printing Maintenance Status Sheet X
CF CHECK X Status ROM A Information X
Unable Clear Error O Reserve Job List X
SELF TEST X Form Overlay List X
Reset All All flashing Color Diagnosis Sheet X
Reset X Warming Up X
Cancel All Print Job X Calibrating Printer X
Status Cancel Print Job X Offline X
Writing ROM A Cancel Print Job X
---
Dont poweroff nnn/mmm*1 Sleep X
Writing ROM P Preheat Mode X
---
Dont poweroff nnn/mmm*1
Ready X
Reset to Save X
(Printing) X
Please Select File ---
(Communication with inactive I/F) ---
Please wait for print ---
(Job being executed (printing OK)) ---
USB Memory Searching Files : nnn ---
Can't Print File ---
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 22

Confidential
Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages
Class Printer Status Error LED status Class Printer Status Error LED status
Reserve Job Canceled X Service Req Cffff*3 All flashing
CompactFlash Full X Service Req Eggg*3 All flashing
Form Data Canceled X Optional RAM Error O
PS3 CompactFlash Full X Format Required
O
Can't Print X No=LeftSW Yes=OK SW
Collate Disabled X Write Error ROM A O

Check Paper Size X Write Error ROM P O
Image Optimum X Jam Paper Size Error O
Check Paper Type X Check Transparency O
Need Memory X Paper Jam w w w w w*4 O
Not Supported USB Device XXX*2 X Wrong Toner Cartridge uuuu*5 O
Format Error ROM A X Toner Cart Error uuuu*5 O
Correct time using Time Setting X Install Photocon uuuu*5 O
Replace Photocon uuuu*3 X Install uuuu*5 TnrCart O
uuuu*3 Toner Low X Install Waste Toner Box O
Warning Error
Photocon uuuu*3 Needed Soon X Wrong Photocon uuuu*5 O
Waste Toner Box Near Full X Photocon Trouble uuuu*5 O
Replace Fuser 2 Replace Photocon uuuu*5 O
Replace Transfer Unit 2 Replace Photocon uuuu*5 2
Replace Maintenance Unit 2 Replace Toner uuuu*5 O

Replace Feed Roller C2 2 Replace Toner uuuu*5 O
Replace Feed Roller C3 2 NonGenuineToner uuuu*5 O
Replace Feed Roller C4 X Replace Waste Toner Box O
Fuser Needed Soon X Replace Fuser O
Transfer Unit Needed Soon X Replace Fuser 2
Maintenance Unit Needed Soon X Replace Transfer Unit 2
Feed Roller C2 Needed Soon X Replace Maintenance Unit 2
Feed Roller C3 Needed Soon X Replace Feed Roller C2 2
Feed Roller C4 Needed Soon X Replace Feed Roller C3 2
Non-Genuine Toner Cartridge X Replace Feed Roller C4 2

Confidential
Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages Note : Messages in the table are sorted in the order descending priorities. The message shown
at top of the table has the highest priority.
Class Printer Status Error LED status
*1 : nnn = Number of written blocks, mmm = total number of blocks
Set Release Lever to ppp*6 Position O
*2 : "XXX" is replaced with Hub when a USB memory with a hub is installed. Otherwise,
w w w w*7 Open O
it is displayed as a blank.
Manual Feed sss 2
*3 : See 3.3.3 Controller Related Error (p.129) for details.
Turn Paper Cassette1 O
*4 : WWWWW indicates the jammed or opened point. See 3.2.1 Checking a paper
Turn Paper Cassette2 O jam type and jammed location (p.99).
Turn Paper Cassette3 O *5 : uuuu = Either of the following will appear: C, M,Y, K, Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow
Turn Paper Cassette4 O (Y), Black (K). Only when a message exceeds the display digit in full spelling,
abbreviated forms (C, M, Y, K) will appear.
Cant Print Duplex 1
*6 : ppp = Either of the following will appear: Envelope, Normal.
Paper Out ttt*8 sss*9 O
*7 : Error location
Error Paper Set ttt*8 sss*9 1
*8 : Displays relevant values of the paper source in the panel setting except Auto.
Print Overrun 1
*9 : Displays relevant values of each paper feed size of the Tray menu in the panel setting.
Memory Overflow 1
Duplex Memory Overflow 1
Invalid Data 1
CompactFlash Error O
Invalid N/W Module O
Invalid PS3 O
Invalid AUX I/F Card O
Invalid ROM A O

Confidential
1.2.1 Error Message and Troubleshooting Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting
l
Message Explanation Remedy
Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting
1. Replace the photoconductor
Message Explanation Remedy unit of the specified color
A CompactFlash which does not with a normal one.
The photoconductor unit of the
have two partitions has been Photocon Trouble uuuu 2. Replace with a new
specified color is out of order.
installed. photoconductor unit.
Press the OK button to
An unformatted CompactFlash If the error is not cancelled, turn
Format Required format the CompactFlash.
has been installed. the printer off and on again.
No=LeftSW Turn off the printer without
Yes=OK SW The printer is turned on after any operation and remove The toner cartridge of the
executing "Format the CompactFlash. specified color is not
Install the toner cartridge for
CompactFlash" or "Delete All installed. Or it is not
the specified color.
CompactFlash Data" of the installed correctly.
Install uuuu TnrCart If a toner cartridge is
Support Menu. The tape has not been
installed, remove it, remove
Remove the jammed paper and removed from the toner
the tape, and reinstall it.
Paper Jam close the cover. Printing will be cartridge of the specified
Paper jam in the displayed area. color.
WWWWW started again from where the jam
occurred. Refer to Figure 1-8. The photoconductor unit of
Transparency is specified, but Remove the media from the MP the specified color is not
Install the photoconductor
media other than transparencies Tray. Open and close cover F. installed. Or it is not
unit for the specified color.
Check Transparency were fed. Or transparency is not Load the correct media to start installed correctly.
Install Photocon uuuu If a photoconductor unit is
specified, but transparencies was printing again from where the The tape has not been
installed, remove it, remove
fed. jam occurred. removed from the
the tape, and reinstall it.
photoconductor unit of the
The error is cleared either by
specified color.
replacing it with a genuine toner
The toner cartridge of the The toner cartridge of the
NonGenuineToner uuuu or selecting continuing use Replace with a legitimate toner
specified color is non-genuine. Wrong Toner uuuu specified color is invalid
according to the user cartridge.
confirmation flow. (different destination).
1. Replace the toner cartridge of Printing has stopped because
the specified color with a the toner cartridge of the
normal one. specified color has reached Replace with a new toner
Toner Cartridge Error The toner cartridge of the Replace Toner uuuu
2. Replace with a new toner its lifetime. cartridge of the specified color.
uuuu specified color is out of order. Cannot be cleared by the
cartridge.
If the error is not cancelled, turn Start/Stop switch.
the printer off and on again. The waste toner box is not
Install Waste Toner Box installed. Or it is not installed Install a waste toner box.
correctly.
The photoconductor unit of the
Replace with a legitimate
Wrong Photocon uuuu specified color is invalid
photoconductor unit.
(different destination).

Confidential
Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting
Message Explanation Remedy Message Explanation Remedy
Error LED flashing Contact Service and replace
Replace with a new Printing has stopped because the paper feed roller. After
photoconductor unit of the paper feed roller has replacement, perform Reset
Printing has stopped because
the specified color. Replace Feed Roller xxx reached its lifetime. xxx Counter on the panel.
the photoconductor unit of
Press the Start/Stop Can be cleared by the Start/ Press the Start/Stop switch to
the specified color has
Replace Photocon uuuu switch to clear the error Stop switch. clear the error and continue
reached its lifetime.
and continue printing. printing.
Cannot be cleared by the
Error LED On Displayed when there is an
Start/Stop switch.
Replace with a new envelope print request after
photoconductor unit of the printing plain paper, or a plain Open cover A, set the release
specified color. Set Release Lever to ppp
paper print request after printing lever to the position shown in
Position
The waste toner box is at the envelopes, prompting the user to the message, and close cover A.
Replace Waste Toner end of its product lifetime. Replace with a new waste toner set the release lever to the
Box correct position.
Cannot be cleared by the box.
Start/Stop switch. The error is cleared by closing
wwww Open A cover is open. the cover specified. Refer to
Error LED flashing
Figure 1-8.
Replace with a new fuser
Printing has stopped because unit.
the fuser unit has reached its Press the Start/Stop
Replace Fuser lifetime. switch to clear the error
Can be cleared by the Start/ and continue printing.
Stop switch. Error LED On
Replace with a new fuser
unit.
Printing has stopped because Replace with a new transfer
the transfer unit has reached unit.
Replace Transfer Unit its lifetime. Press the Start/Stop switch to
Can be cleared by the Start/ clear the error and continue
Stop switch. printing.
Replace with a new
Printing has stopped because maintenance unit. After
the maintenance unit has replacement, perform Reset
Replace Maintenance
reached its lifetime. Maint Counter on the panel.
Unit
Can be cleared by the Start/ Press the Start/Stop switch
Stop switch. to clear the error and
continue printing.

Confidential
Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting

The installed CompactFlash cover F cover B
cannot be used on this printer or
it is a CompactFlash of less than
4 GB, or "No" is selected when Turn off the printer, remove
"Format Required" occurred. the CompactFlash, and turn
cover A
Invalid CompactFlash This error also occurs under the on the printer.
Error following conditions for a Select "Yes" to format the
CompactFlash with the CompactFlash when "Format
password lock function. Required" occurs. cassette 1 (C1)
Password lock has failed. MP tray
Could not unlock the
cassette 2 (C2)
password lock.
cassette 3 (C3)
This error is cleared by
cassette 4 (C4) cover E2
pressing the Start/Stop
cover E3
switch and the printer prints cover E4
An error resulted as printing was in simplex.
Can't Print Duplex specified with conditions where When Auto Continue is on,
duplex printing is not possible. simplex printing starts after a
certain interval.
If printing does not continue,
cancel the job. cover H
An error occurred because the
width of the paper set in the
feeder device was narrower than
the width set for printing. With When the specified paper
this printer, the error occurs size is correct
when the following conditions Remove the paper from the
are met at the same time. cassette displayed and set the
correct paper. The error is
Turn Paper Cassette 1 The width of the paper size
cleared and printing starts.
(2,3,4) specified for printing is
When the set paper is correct cover D paper path G
210.00mm or more.
Cancel the job for which the
The paper set is less than
error occurred, and resend
210.00 mm wide. Figure 1-8. cover
the data with the correct
The envisioned situation is when
paper size specified.
normally horizontally set A4,
A5, B5, or LT is mistakenly set
vertically.

Confidential
1.2.2 Warning Message and Troubleshooting Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting
Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting
Data was disregarded and not
Message Explanation Remedy printed due to a problem in the
An attempt has been made to data. The following are conditions
Delete or print the registered of this warning.
register a new Re-Print Job, Verify
Re-Print Jobs, Verify Jobs,
Job, Stored Job or Confidential Job Bandwidth of the received data
Stored Jobs or Confidential
though the number of registrations does not match the value
Jobs. This error occurs when a
has reached the maximum. determined by the paper size.
printer driver for a different
When there is another Stored The received data contains
When the user attempted to register printer is used. Check the
Job with the same user name or undefined intermediate codes or
a Re-Print Job or Verify Job, there Can't Print printer and reinstall it if it is an
job name, either change the job compression format.
was already a Stored Job registered incorrect driver. When printing
name and register it or delete Checksums attached to the
by same user name or job name. from a USB memory, check
Reserve Job Canceled the Stored Job. intermediate code data using and reinsert the USB memory.
ESC/Page and ESC/Page-Color
Set RAM Disk to Normal or
do not match checksums of the
Maximum if RAM Disk is set
actual data.
Insufficient capacity of RAM disk. to Off. Increase the RAM Disk
Data cannot be read from the
Or, RAM Disk is set to Off. capacity or add more RAM if
RAM Disk is already set to USB memory where print data
Normal or Maximum. is stored.
Insufficient capacity of The paper size for the loaded paper Set the paper of the specified
Install a CompactFlash if a Check Paper Size
CompactFlash. Or, a and specified paper do not match. size.
CompactFlash is not installed.
CompactFlash is not installed. Printing with PS
Delete unnecessary form data This warning occurs when
The CompactFlash memory is full Printing with PS
and Reserve Jobs (Re-Print, memory is insufficient, and the
CompactFlash Full and collated print jobs, form data, Add memory.
Verify, Stored, and resolution is reduced.
reserve jobs etc. cannot be saved. ESC/Page-Color driver or
Confidential). Printing with the ESC/Page-
Image Optimum EPSON PCL driver
Color driver or EPSON PCL
The user attempted registration Set the priority of the driver
Delete registered forms. Or, driver
after reaching the maximum data compression method
replace the USB memory. This warning occurs when data
number. to quality.
is compressed with a higher
The USB memory is not installed, Check if the USB memory is level of compression.
Form Data Canceled
or was removed while registering. installed. Or, replace with
The USB device (other than a
Or, the capacity of the USB another USB memory with a
memory device) or a USB memory
memory is insufficient. larger capacity.
with a hub currently connected to Disconnect the USB memory
A CompactFlash is not installed. Install a CompactFlash. Not Supported USB the USB port is not supported. A from the USB port, or specify
When downloading PS3 fonts, the Delete previously downloaded Device xxx file check is performed whenever a Clear Warning to clear the
PS3CompactFlash Full CompactFlash memory is full and fonts to empty the new device is found on the USB warning.
the fonts cannot be saved. CompactFlash memory. port, and this error occurs at the
point.

Confidential
Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting
The printer has not been turned on Set the date and time again This message is cancelled by
Correct time using for 10 days or longer and the from Time Setting. This one of the following.
Time Setting capacitor has been warning recurs until they are Executing Clear All
discharged. set again. Message warning that the waste Warnings in the Reset
Waste Toner Box Near
toner box is approaching the end of Menu.
Replace with a new Full
its lifetime. Executing Reset in the
The photoconductor unit for the photoconductor unit of the
specified color. Reset Menu.
specified color has reached its
Replacing the waste toner
lifetime when it has been This message is cancelled
continuously used after the by one of the following. box with a new one.
Replace Photocon uuuu
"Replace Photocon uuuu" error. Executing Clear All This message is cancelled by
The print quality is not guaranteed Warnings in the Reset Message warning that the fuser one of the following.
while this message is being Menu. unit has reached the end of its Executing Clear All
displayed. Executing Reset in the lifetime when it has been Warnings in the Reset
Reset Menu. Replace Fuser continuously used after the Menu.
This message is cancelled by "Replace Fuser" error. The print Executing Reset in the
one of the following. quality is not guaranteed while this Reset Menu.
message is being displayed. Replacing the fuser unit
Executing Clear All
Warnings in the Reset with a new one.
Message warning that remaining Menu. This message is cancelled by
uuuu Toner Low Message warning that the transfer
toner is low for the specified color. Executing Reset in the one of the following.
Reset Menu. unit has reached the end of its
Executing Clear All
lifetime when it has been
Replace with a new toner Warnings in the Reset
continuously used after the
cartridge of the specified Replace Transfer Unit Menu.
"Replace Transfer Unit" error. The
color. Executing Reset in the
print quality is not guaranteed
This message is cancelled by Reset Menu.
while this message is being
one of the following. displayed. Replacing the transfer unit
Executing Clear All
with a new one.
Message warning that the Warnings in the Reset This message is cancelled by
Photocon uuuu Needed photoconductor unit of the Menu. Message warning that the one of the following.
maintenance unit has reached its
Soon specified color is approaching the Executing Reset in the Executing Clear All
end of its lifetime. lifetime when it has been
Reset Menu. Warnings in the Reset
Replace Maintenance continuously used after the
Replace with a new Menu.
Unit "Replace Maintenance Unit" error.
photoconductor unit of the Executing Reset in the
The print quality is not guaranteed
specified color. Reset Menu.
displayed. Replacing the maintenance
unit with a new one.

Confidential
Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting Table 1-8. Warning Message and Troubleshooting
This message is cancelled by This message is cancelled by
Message warning that the paper one of the following. one of the following.
feed roller has reached the end of
Executing Clear All Executing Clear All
its lifetime when it has been
Warnings in the Reset Message warning that the paper Warnings in the Reset
Replace Feed Roller continuously used after the Feed Roller xxxNeeded
Menu. feed roller is approaching the end Menu.
xxx "Replace Feed Roller xxx" error. Soon
Executing Reset in the of its lifetime. Executing Reset in the
The print quality is not guaranteed
Reset Menu. Reset Menu.
displayed. Replacing the feed roller Replacing the feed roller
with a new one. with a new one.
This message is cancelled by This message is cancelled by
one of the following. one of the following.
Executing Clear All Replacing with a genuine
Warnings in the Reset toner cartridge.
The fuser unit is approaching its
Fuser Needed Soon Menu. Warning message that the toner Executing Clear All
lifetime.
Executing Reset in the Non-Genuine Toner cartridge is non-genuine when Warnings.
Reset Menu. Cartridge selecting continued use in the user Executing Reset in the
Replacing the fuser unit confirmation flow. Reset Menu.
with a new one. The message occurs when the
This message is cancelled by power is turned on again until
one of the following. the cartridge is replaced with a
genuine product.
Executing Clear All
Warnings in the Reset
Transfer Unit Needed The transfer unit is approaching its
Menu.
Soon lifetime.
Executing Reset in the
Reset Menu.
Replacing the transfer unit
with a new one.
This message is cancelled by
one of the following.
Executing Clear All
This message appears when the Warnings in the Reset
Maintenance Unit
maintenance unit is approaching its Menu.
Needed Soon
lifetime. Executing Reset in the
Reset Menu.
Replacing the maintenance
unit with a new one.

Confidential
CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Confidential
2.1 Print Process DrumBk DrumC DrumM DrumY

This printer is a "Full color page printer" that uses the principle of 1.Charging 1.Charging 1.Charging 1.Charging
electrophotographic recording. Each YMCK color (yellow, magenta, cyan,
black) has its own special drum (Photoconductor (PC) drum) and developer
2.Exposure 2.Exposure 2.Exposure 2.Exposure
that are used in tandem. Since each color is developed simultaneously, the
5.Cleaning 5.Cleaning 5.Cleaning
color image can be printed at high speed comparing to the four cycles engine 5.Cleaning
printer. The transfer intermediate is coordinated, and at the end of the process 3.Developing 3.Developing 3.Developing 3.Developing
the layered color toner images produce a full color print. The major steps of the
print process are described below.
4. Primary transfer (DrumIntermediate Transfer Belt)
1. Charging: The PC Drum surfaces are charged with electricity.
2. Exposure: Image areas are exposed on PC Drum with laser radiation.
Transfer belt 8. Cleaning
3. Developing: Image areas on drums are developed with toner.
4. Primary transfer: The toner image on PC Drum is transferred to Intermediate
6. Secondary transfer (Intermediate
Transfer Belt. Transfer BeltPaper)
5. Cleaning: PC Drum are cleaned.
6. Secondary transfer: The complete four-color toner image on the Intermediate 7.Electrical discharge
Transfer Belt is transferred to the paper. Paper
7. Electrical discharge:The electrical charge of the paper is discharged. 9.Fusing
8. Cleaning: Intermediate Transfer Belt are cleaned.

Figure 2-1. Print Process
9. Fusing: Toner on the paper is fused with heat and pressure.
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Print Process 32

Confidential
2.2 Operating Principle of Main Unit Mechanism
2.2.1 Center cross section
[17] [18] [19] 1. Fusing Unit 12. Photoconductor Unit/Y

2. Transfer Belt Unit 13. Photoconductor Unit/M
[16]
[1] 3. 2nd Transfer Roller 14. Photoconductor Unit/C
[2] 4. MP tray 15. Photoconductor Unit/K
[15]
[3] 5. Standard Cassette 16. Toner Cartridge/Y
[14] 6. Optional Cassette 17. Toner Cartridge/M
[13] 7. Print Head Unit (PH Unit) /K 18. Toner Cartridge/C
[4] 8. Print Head Unit (PH Unit) /C 19. Toner Cartridge/Y
[12]
9. Print Head Unit (PH Unit) /M
10. Print Head Unit (PH Unit) /Y
[5] 11. Waste Toner Collector
[11]
[6]
[10] [9] [8] [7] 4039T1C102AA
Figure 2-2. Center cross section
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Operating Principle of Main Unit Mechanism 33

Confidential
PAPER PATH
Normally, papers are supplied from 2 bins. MP tray (100 papers) and Standard
cassette (250 papers).
5 bins of paper supply can be available by setting maximum three optional
cassette (500 papers).
A Paper supplied from each Tray is transported to the Vertical Transport
then an image is transferred in the 2nd Transfer Roller and fused in the
Fusing Unit. Finally, the paper is exited with face down.
Duplex mechanism of this machine uses circuit system. The major steps of
Duplex are described below (When two documents are printed in Duplex).
1. Firstly, printing back up (back side of the paper) is executed. After an image
is fused, the transfer route is switched at Paper exit section and the paper is
drawn back inside the Duplex Unit.
2. The paper is reversed and transported from the Duplex Unit to the paper
route in front of the Registration Roller.
3. Printing the front page (surface of the paper) is executed and after an image
is fused, papers are exited to the Exit tray.
4039T1C103AA
Figure 2-3. Paper path

Confidential
2.2.2 Parts layout drawing

ENGINE SECTION
[12] [1]
[11] [2]
[1] [10]
[10] [3]
[9]
[9] [8]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[5] [4]
4039F5C502DA
4039F5C501DA
[1] IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE2) [6] Controller Board (PWB-P) [1] Fusing Drive Motor (M4) [7] Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12)
[2] IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (SE1) [7] Program ROM DIMM (WORK0) [2] Main Motor (M1) [8] Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
[3] Control Panel (PWB-OP) [8] RTC Board (PWB-RTC) [3] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11) [9] Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22)
[4] PH Interface Board (PWB-D) [9] Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) [4] Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) [10] Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
[5] DC Power Supply (PU1) [10] High Voltage Unit (HV1) [5] Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) [11] Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
[6] Color Developing Motor (M3) [12] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M13)

Confidential
[10] [13] [1]

[12] [2]
[9]
[11]
[8] [3]
[7] [1]
[10] [4]
[2]
[9] [5]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[4]
4039F5C503DA [6] 4039F5C504DA
[1] Developing Clutch/K (CL4) [8] Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8)
[1] Right Door Switch (S5) [6] Front Door Switch/2 (S4)
[2] Exit Sensor (PC2) [9] Color PC Drive Main Sensor (PC17)
[2] Primary Interlock Switch (S2) [7] Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA4)
[3] Temperature/Humidity Sensor (SE3) [10] Color PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC18)
[3] PH Unit [8] Main Erase Lamp/M (LA3)
[4] Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) [11] Black PC Drive Main Sensor (PC15)
[4] Main Power Switch (S1) [9] Main Erase Lamp/C (LA2)
[5] OHP Sensor (PC4) [12] Black PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC16)
[5] Front Door Switch/1 (S3) [10] Main Erase Lamp/K (LA1)
[6] Registration Roller Clutch (CL1) [13] 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Clutch (CL3)
[7] 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Position Sensor (PC6)

Confidential
STANDARD CASSETTE [4]

[11]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[8]
4039T2C113AA 4038T2C111AA
[6]
[7]
4038T2C026DB
[1]
[1] Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) [7] Standard Cassette CD Paper Size Sensor
[2] (PC9)
[2] Standard Cassette Feed Roller [8] Standard Cassette Separation Roller
[3] Standard Cassette Separation Roller [9] Standard Cassette Feed Roller (Bypass)
[4] Standard Cassette Device Detection [10] Standard Cassette Paper Empty Sensor
Sensor (PC12) (PC10)
[5] Standard Cassette Paper Near-Empty [11] Standard Cassette Paper Feed Clutch
[3]
Sensor (PC11) (CL2)
[6] Standard Cassette Paper Size Board
(PWB-I)
4038T2C171AA

Confidential
2.2.3 PH Unit 2.2.3.2 Operation
2.2.3.1 Composition OUTLINE

4 types of the PH Unit are used for exposure process.
The surface of the Photo Conductor is irradiated with a laser light and an
electrostatic latent image is thereby formed.
2 Beam Array LD is used to prevent the rotation speed from increasing
caused by decreasing the number of the sides comparing to Polygon Mirror
which has four sides.
2 Beam Array LD scans in two lines two lasers irradiated by two LD
4038T2C008AA
electrical components set up vertically with one side of Polygon Mirror.
PH Unit Transfer Belt
4039T2C106AA
Y M C K
2nd Transfer
Roller
Polygon Motor PC Drum
SOS Mirror
LD/Y LD/M LD/C LD/K
Laser Diode Surface of the PC Drum

Beam A
Beam A Two lines
Beam B One scan
Beam B
Laser Diode PC Drum

Polygon
Direction
Mirror of rotation
of the PC
Drum
SOS Sensor G1 Lens
4038T2C034AA G2 Lens
Figure 2-4. Composition Return Mirror 2 Return Mirror 1 4038t2J005AB
Figure 2-5. Overview

Confidential
LASER SHUTTER MECHANISM LASER EMISSION AREA
There is a shutter mechanism provided to prevent the PH from being Main scan direction (CD)
contaminated with foreign matter such as dust when the front cover is opened, The print start position is determined by the start signal for main scan
or prevent the emission laser from leaking outside for any reason. print and the range of the paper size output from the Mechanical
Control Board (PWB-P).
The Shutter operates relative to the removing and inserting Photoconductor
The laser emission area is determined by the paper size. The area of 4 mm/
Unit because PH Unit is not exposed concerning the layout of the unit when
0.157 inch on both edges of the paper is, however, the void image area.
Photoconductor Unit is inserted. The shutter opens by pressing shutter guide at
insertion of the Photoconductor Unit, and closes at de-installation of the Sub scan direction (FD)
Photoconductor Unit. The print start position is determined by the writing image signal and the
range of the paper size output from the Mechanical Control Board (PWB-P).
The laser emission area is determined by the paper size. The area of 4.2
mm/0.165 inch on the leading and trailing edges and 4 mm/0.157 inch
on both the side edges of the paper are, however, the void image area.
Shutter Start signal
for main Writing
scan print image
signal
Void width: 4 mm/0.157 inch Void width: 4 mm/0.157 inch
Void width: 4.2 mm/

Shutter Guide 0.165 inch
Figure 2-6. Laser shutter mechanism
Void width: 4.2 mm/

0.165 inch
4138to2595c0
Figure 2-7. Laser emission area

Confidential
REGISTRATION CONTROL (COLOR SHIFT CORRECTION) SYSTEM SKEW CONTROL MECHANISM
In a tandem engine, in which an independent image reproduction process is When the PH Unit is mounted on the main body installation plate, image
provided for each of the four different colors of toner. Incorrect color distortion (skew) occurs due to mounting error. Therefore the PH Unit
registration, or color shift, is therefore more likely to occur due to each of adopts the correction system.
the PH Units being out of correct position. The color shift correction
system automatically detects any misalignment among the different colors,
correcting it both in the main scanning and sub scanning directions.
The color shift correction is made when the Front Door is opened and
closed, the Transfer Belt is removed and reinstalled, the Main Power
Switch is turned OFF and ON, or "Calibration" is carried out from the
Control Panel.
IDC/Registration Sensor/1 and /2

(SE1, SE2)
Transfer Belt
4038T2C033DA
Figure 2-9. Skew Control Mechanism 1
The main body skew can be corrected by adjusting the dial of the
corresponding PH Unit (Y, M, C).
Figure 2-8. Registration Control (Color Shift Correction) System
Figure 2-10. Skew Control Mechanism 2

Confidential
2.2.4 Photoconductor Unit section (PU section) 2.2.4.2 Drive

Main Motor (M1)
2.2.4.1 Composition Developing
Clutch/K (CL4)
Color PC Drum
Motor (M2)
Color Developing
Motor (M3)
4038T2C010AA
Photoconductor Unit/Y, M, C
4039T2C107AA
Figure 2-12. Drive Overview

4038T2C009AA
Photoconductor Unit/K
PC Drum/Y, M, C, K
Developing Unit/
Y, M, C, K Toner Collecting Screw
Cleaning Blade
PC Drum Charge Corona/

Y, M, C, K
Figure 2-11. Composition

Confidential
2.2.4.3 Operation When life is reached

PU Life is detected by the PU Life counter value.
PU LIFE CONTROL
When the PU Life counter value is reached to the near life value, the
Each PU has IC chip that detects a new PU, keeps track of the service life of warning message "Photocon xxxx Needed Soon" is displayed.
the PU and installation. When the PU Life counter value is reached to the life value, the
warning message "Replace Photocon xxxx" is displayed.
New PU detection
New PU is detected when the Main Power Switch is turned ON and the
Front Door is closed.
When a new PU is detected, a TCR adjustment sequence is carried out.
Operation when a new PU is detected
1st image transfer/

Transfer Belt TCR Transfer Belt auto transfer Image
is retracted automatic cleaning voltage control stabilization
adjustment adjustment
Operation when a new PU is not detected
Transfer 1st image transfer/

Transfer Belt auto transfer Image
Belt is cleaning voltage control stabilization
retracted adjustment
4036ma2133c0
4038T2C009AA
Figure 2-13. Detection of new PU

Confidential
2.2.5 Photo Conductor section 2.2.5.2 Drive
2.2.5.1 Composition PC DRUM DRIVE MECHANISM
Two independent PC Drum Motors (for color and monochrome) are used for
the drive mechanism.
The Color PC Drum Motor drives the PC Drums/Y, M, and C, while the Main
Motor drives the PC Drum/K.
.
4038T2C013AA
PC Drum Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Main Motor (M1)
Charge Generating Layer (CGL)

PC Drum/K PC Drum/C
Charge Transport Layer (CTL)
Aluminum Cylinder
PC Drum/Y PC Drum/M
4036ma2338c0

Figure 2-15. Drive overview

Confidential
2.2.6 Charge Corona section

2.2.6.1 Composition
Grid Mesh
4039T2C108AA
Comb
Electrode
Cleaning Blade
Comb Electrode/Y, M, C, K
Grid Mesh
4038T2C027AA

Confidential
2.2.6.2 Operation CLEANING/MAIN ERASE MECHANISM
PC DRUM CHARGE CORONA ON/OFF CONTROL 1. The Cleaning Blade is pressed up against the surface of the PC Drum, scraping
residual toner off the surface (forward blade system).
The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the Grid Mesh is controlled through the image
stabilization control. 2. Toner, which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum, is fed by the Toner
Collecting Screw back toward to the Conveying Screw in the rear of the machine.
It is then collected in the Waste Toner Collecting Box.
Main Motor (M1) ON
3. The surface of the PC Drum after the image transfer process is irradiated with light
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) ON
from the Main Erase Lamp. This neutralizes any potential left on the surface of the
Drum Charge Corona Bias Y, M, C
PC Drum.
Drum Charge Corona Bias K
Developing Clutch/K (CL4)
Cleaning Blade
Color Developing Motor (M3)
4038T2C024AA
4038T2C030AA
Toner Collecting Screw
Cleaning Blade
Figure 2-17. Cleaning/Main Erase mechanism

Confidential
2.2.7 Developing section

Main Motor (M1)
2.2.7.1 Composition
Developing Clutch/K (CL4)
Color PC Drum
Motor (M2) PC Drum/K
Developing Roller
Color Developing
Motor (M3)
PC Drum/Y
Supply/Agitating/
Conveying Screws
4039T2C107AA
Figure 2-19. Composition 2
Doctor Blade
Toner Conveying
Screw Developing Roller
Toner Supply Screw
4038to503c0

Confidential
2.2.7.2 Drive 2.2.7.3 Operation
Main Motor (M1) DEVELOPING DRIVE CONTROL

Developing Clutch/K (CL4) Toner Collecting Screw
Color PC Drum Main Motor (M1)

Motor (M2)
Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
PC Drum/K
Developing Developing Clutch/K (CL4)
Roller
Drum Charge Corona Bias/K
Drum Charge Corona Bias/Y, M, C
Color Developing
Motor (M3) Developing Bias/K (DC)
Developing Bias/K (AC)
Developing Bias/Y, M, C (DC)
PC Drum/Y
Developing Bias/Y, M, C (AC)
1st Image Transfer Pressure/
Retraction Clutch (CL3)
Supply/Agitating/
Conveying Screws 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/
Retraction Motor (M5)
4038T2C025AA
Figure 2-20. Drive overview Figure 2-21. Developing Drive control

Confidential
DEVELOPER FLOW
Toner Supplied from Hopper
1. Toner supplied from the rear end of the Developing Unit is fed to the lower screw.
It is then fed to the front of the unit, while being mixed with developer and
electrically charged by the Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws. PC Drum/Y
2. The TCR Sensor installed on the underside of the Developing Unit detects toner-to
carrier ratio during this time.
3. The developer, fed to the front of the Developing Unit, is conveyed further to the
upper screw.
4. The Toner sticks to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the PC Drum.
The developer that is left on the Sleeve is returned to the lower screw by the
magnetic pole positioning of the Developing Roller. It is then conveyed to the rear
side of the Photoconductor Unit.
Doctor Blade Developing Roller
Supply/Agitating/Conveying
Screws
Figure 2-22. Developer flow (For PU/Y)

Confidential
DEVELOPING BIAS
The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the Developing Roller so

that an adequate amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the PC Pressure Plate
Drum. Developing Bias Terminal
(Main Body Side)
During development, Vdc of DC(-) + is applied so that Toner can be
attracted PC Drum easily. This component of AC is applied only during
development. Other than during development, only Vdc of DC(-) is
applied.
The developing bias (Vdc) is supplied from High Voltage Unit (HV1).
Developing Roller
4038T2C035AA
Pressure Plate
Developing Roller
Figure 2-23. Developing bias

Confidential
DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM TCR SENSOR CONTROL
The machine employs the two-component non-contact development system to The TCR Sensor detects toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer. In the
achieve even finer reproduction. Mechanical Control Board, the amount of the toner supplied to the
Developing Unit is determined by the detected ratio. Magnetic Sensor is
mounted on the underside of the Developing Sections.
The magnetic permeability (powder density) of the carrier in the developer
is measured to determine the T/C.
A polyester film is provided for the Conveying Screw portion to scrape
toner off the surface of the TCR Sensor.
Developing Roller The TCR Sensor is integrated with the Photoconductor Unit. When the
PC Drum TCR Sensor is breakdown, the entire Photoconductor Unit must be
replaced.
Magnetic TCR Sensor
4036ma2013c0
Figure 2-24. Development system
4038T2C031AA
Polyester
film
TCR Sensor
4038to503c0
Figure 2-25. TCR Sensor

Confidential
2.2.8 Toner Supply section

2.2.8.1 Composition
Toner Supply
Toner Supply Drive Section/K
Drive Section/M
Toner Supply
Drive Section/Y Toner Supply
Drive Section/C
4038T2C004AA
4039T2C109AA
Agitating Blade/K
Toner Cartridge/K
4038T2C014AA 4038T2C015AA Agitating Blade/Y, M, C

Toner Cartridge/K Toner Cartridge/Y, M, C
Toner Cartridge/Y, M, C EEPROM Board/K
EEPROM Board/Y, M, C

Confidential

Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
TONER REPLENISHING MECHANISM/CONTROL
Toner replenishing mechanism

A single Toner Supply Motor is turned either forward or backward to
supply toner of two different colors (Toner Supply Motor for K and C, and
Toner Supply Motor for Y and M).
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
Toner Supply Toner Supply
K Toner C Toner Y Toner M Toner
Motor C/K (M7) Motor Y/M (M6)
Turned forward Energized De-energized Turned forward Energized De-energized
Turned backward De-energized Energized Turned backward De-energized Energized
One-way Clutch
Figure 2-28. Toner replenishing mechanism

Toner replenishing control
T/C is detected when the Developing Clutch/K (CL4) is energized for
K or when the Color Developing Motor (M3) is energized for C, M,
and Y.
Based on T/C ratio detected by the TCR sensor and amount of
consumption calculated by the dot counter, toner replenishing time
(amount) is determined.

Confidential
TONER CARTRIDGE LIFE CONTROL SHUTTER MECHANISM
Toner Cartridge detection/New unit detection timing To prevent toner from being spilled when the Toner Cartridge is removed from
Detection is controlled by confirming the data of each unit with access the machine, there is a shutter mechanism provided. When the Toner Cartridge
to IC chip when the front door is closed. is installed in the machine, the shutter opens.
Based on the data, the machine confirms if the cartridge is mounted or
not. Put the Supply Port face up when Toner Cartridge is
After detecting the presence of the cartridge, with the data machine removed from the machine. Do not open the Shutter with the
checks if the cartridge is new or not. Supply Port faced down.
Before Toner Cartridge is Installed When Toner Cartridge is Installed

Shutter
4038T2C015AA
Figure 2-29. Toner Cartridge IC Chip
Toner Empty detection control

A toner empty condition can be divided into 3 groups: Normal, Near-
Empty, Empty
Toner Near-Empty detection control
When new toner is set, toner remaining level is set to IC chip. Based on 4038T2C018AA 4038T2C019AA
the remaining level, the machine calculates and gives subtraction of the Figure 2-30. Shutter mechanism
toner replenishing amount from the hours which the toner replenishing
motor has turned. When the level reaches the given amount of toner
remaining, Toner Near-Empty warning is displayed.
Toner Empty control
After a near-empty condition is detected, the toner density detected by
the TCR sensor, at every T/C ratio detection timing, is compared with
the target toner density. When the value reaches the given level, Toner
Empty warning is displayed.

Confidential
2.2.9 Transfer Corona section

2.2.9.1 Composition
1ST IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION
4038T2C105AA
Fusing Motor (M4)
4039T2C110AA
Pressure Cam
Retraction Roller 1st Image Transfer Roller/M 1st Image Transfer Roller/K
1st Image Transfer 1st Image Transfer
Roller/Y Roller/C 2nd Transfer Roller
1st Image Transfer

Retraction Position
Sensor (PC6)
Transfer Belt Drive Roller
Cleaning Blade
4038T2C151AA
4038T2C018DB

Confidential
2ND IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION
2nd Transfer Roller
Temperature/Humidity Sensor
4038T2C117AA (SE3)
4039T2C11AA
4038T2C152AA
IDC/Registration Sensor /2 (SE2) IDC/Registration Sensor /1 (SE1)
2nd Transfer Roller

Shutter
2nd Image Transfer Pressure

IDC/Registration Sensor /2 (SE2)
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/

Retraction Motor (M5)
Shutter
4038T2C106AA IDC/Registration Sensor /1 (SE1)
Temperature/Humidity Sensor (SE3)
4038T2C019DA

Confidential
2.2.9.2 Drive 2ND IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION
1ST IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION 2nd Transfer Roller

2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
Shutter (PC7)
Transfer Belt
Pressure Lever
Main Motor (M1)
IDC/Registration
Sensor/2 (SE2)
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Cam

Retraction Motor (M5) Shutter
IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (SE1)
4038T2C019DA
4038T2C020DA
Main Motor (M1) Figure 2-34. Drive overview
Fusing Drive Motor 1st Image Transfer Roller/K

(M4) 1st Image Transfer Roller/C
1st Image Transfer Roller/M
1st Image Transfer Roller/Y
Retraction Roller
1st Image Transfer

Pressure/Retraction
Clutch (CL3)
1st Image Transfer

Retraction Position
Sensor (PC6) 4038T2C021DB

Confidential
2.2.9.3 Operation 7. Turn the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) OFF.
8. The Cam will stop rotating and the siding plate will stop.
TRANSFER BELT DRIVE MECHANISM 9. The 1st Image Transfer Roller (Y, M, and C) will stay being pressed.
Retraction operation
The Transfer Belt is driven by the Main Motor (M1).
1. The rotation of the Fusing Drive Motor (M4) will be transferred to the 1st
Revolving speed of the Main Motor (M1) can be switched by the motor Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3).
clock. 2. When the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) is turned ON,
rotation of the Fusing Drive Motor (M4) will be transferred to the drive gear.
1ST IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLER MECHANISM 3. The Cam will rotate to move the sliding plate as the drive gear rotates.
4. The 1st Image Transfer Roller (Y, M, and C) will move up to retract from the
Pressure/Retraction mechanism is equipped for pressing the 1st Image Transfer Belt as the sliding plate moves.
Transfer Rollers (Y, M, C) to inside the Transfer Belt at the 1st image 5. The slide plate moves the Actuator for the 1st Image Transfer Retraction
transfer. Position Sensor down.
The 1st Image Transfer Roller (K) does not have Pressure/Retraction 6. The Actuator unblocks the 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor
mechanism. The 1st Image Transfer Roller (K) always presses the Transfer (PC6) to detect the slides movement.
Belt to the PC Drum (K). 7. Turn the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) OFF.
8. The Cam will stop rotating to stop the sliding plate.
Driving force is transferred from the Fusing Motor (M4) to the Pressure/ 9. The 1st Image Transfer Roller (Y, M, and C) will keep their retraction
Retraction mechanism through the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction position.
Clutch (CL3).
Main Motor (M4)
The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC6) detects the 1st
Image Transfer Roller at its retracted position. Fusing Drive
Motor (M4)
Pressure/retraction operation
Pressure operation
1. Rotation of the Fusing Drive Motor (M4) is transferred to the 1st Image
Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3).
2. When the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) is turned ON,
the rotation of the Fusing Drive Motor (M4) is transferred to the drive gear.
3. Rotation of the drive gear turns the pressure cam, which allows the Sliding
Plate to move.
4. The 1st Image Transfer Roller (Y, M, and C) will move down to be pressed to 1st Image Transfer Pressure/
the Transfer Belt when the sliding plate moves.
5. The slide plate moves the Actuator for the 1st Image Transfer Retraction
Position Sensor up. 4038T2C021DB
6. The Actuator blocks the 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC6)
to detect the slide plates movement. Figure 2-35. Pressure/Retraction mechanism

Confidential
Operation timing Pressure position changing mechanism

To extend the service life of the PC Drum/Y, M, C, the pressure
Start Key ON Paper Moves Past 2nd Transfer Roller position of the 1st Image Transfer Roller is changed between the
monochrome mode and the color mode. In the monochrome mode, the
Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
1st Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C is left in the retracted position and
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Clutch (CL3) the PC Drum/Y, M, C is stopped.
1st Image Transfer Retraction Position
Sensor (PC6) Color mode:
4038T2C136AA The pressure position of the Image Transfer Roller is where the PC Drum is in
contact with the Transfer Belt for all four colors of toner.
In order to transfer the original without missing any part, a Retraction Roller
is mounted at the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Y so the 1st Image Transfer
Roller/Y will properly contact to the PC Drum/Y.
Monochrome mode:
The pressure position of the Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C is where
the PC Drum/Y, M, C leaves the Transfer Belt. While that of the Image
Transfer Roller/K is where the PC Drum/K is in contact with the
Transfer Belt. This allows the PC Drum/Y, M, C to remain stationary
in this mode.
Transfer Belt 1st Image Transfer Roller
PC Drum
4038T2C162AA
Figure 2-36. Monochrome Mode
Retraction Roller
4038T2C163AA
Figure 2-37. Color Mode

Confidential
2ND TRANSFER ROLLER PRESSURE MECHANISM
The 2nd Transfer Roller has the Pressure/Retraction mechanism which presses
to and retracts from the Transfer Belt so the patterns made on the Transfer Belt
except by printing (such as detection pattern during Image Stabilization) will 2nd Image Transfer
not affect the 2nd Transfer Roller. Pressure/Retraction Pressure Lever
Motor (M5)
Pressure/retraction operation
Cam
1. Drive from the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor is transmitted
through a gear train to the drive gear.
2nd Image Transfer Pressure 4038T2C022DA
2. The drive gear rotates to rotate the Cam half way. Releasing the Pressure
lever will press the 2nd Transfer Roller to the Transfer Belt.
3. At this time, the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor detects whether
the 2nd Transfer Roller is located at the pressure position. Drive Roller 2nd Transfer Roller
4. The Cam will rotate half way when the Motor turns ON again. Moving the
Pressure lever down will move the 2nd Transfer Roller to the retraction
position and will stop.
Cam
Pressure Lever
4038T2C167AA
4038T2C168AA
When Pressed When Retracted
Figure 2-38. Pressure/Retraction Operation overview
Operation Timing
Start Key ON Paper moves past 2nd Transfer Roller
Main Motor (M1)

2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Motor (M5)
2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
(PC7)
4038T2C136AA

Confidential
IDC SENSOR SHUTTER MECHANISM Shutter is closed Shutter is open
The IDC Sensor can be contaminated with toner since it is located under Image
transfer
the Transfer Belt. There is a shutter mechanism provided for the sensor to Roller
Pressure Retraction
prevent it from being contaminated. Operation
The shutter opens and closes in synchronism with the pressure and
retraction motion of the 2nd Transfer Roller.
The Cam will press the Pressure lever to open the shutter on the IDC
Sensor during retraction.
The Cam will press the Pressure lever to close the shutter on the IDC Lever
Sensor while the roller is pressing. Operation
Shutter Open/Close Operation

1. Drive from the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor is transmitted
through a gear train to the drive gear. 4038T2C169AA 4038T2C170AA
2. The drive gear will rotate to turn the Cam half way. Pressing the Pressure
lever down will open the shutter.
3. Turning the motor ON again will turn the Cam half way. Releasing the
Pressure lever will close the shutter.
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M5)

Outside
Shutter
4038T2C107AA
4038T2C108AA
IDC/Registration
Sensor/2 (SE2)
IDC/Registration Shutter
Sensor/1 (SE1)
6%##
Figure 2-39. Shutter Open/Close Operation

Confidential
AUTO TRANSFER VOLTAGE CONTROL REVERSING CONTROL OF THE TRANSFER BELT
To optimize image transfer output, the machine is provided with auto transfer Paper dust or toner between the Transfer Belt and the edge of the Cleaning
voltage control. The control lets a constant current flow through each of the blade will be removed by slightly rotating the Transfer Belt backward and then
Image Transfer Rollers. Then, from the voltage detected, the resistances of the rotating it forward again.
1st Image Transfer Roller, 2nd Transfer Roller, and Transfer Belt are
The Cleaning will be executed at the end of each print job sequence.
measured. The optimum image transfer output voltages applied to the 1st and
2nd Transfer Rollers during printing are thereby automatically adjusted. Cleaning will be performed when the power is turned ON, the door is
opened or closed, or the deep sleep mode (heater off mode) is released.
The 1st and 2nd image transfer auto transfer voltage control operations are
carried out immediately before the execution of image stabilization control. Cleaning will be performed when Image stabilization is finished.
TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
The Cleaning blade is mounted on the Transfer Belt in order to remove the
remaining toner at the Transfer Belt.
The Cleaning blade is always pressed to the Transfer Belt by the Fixed blade
system.
Transfer Belt
Toner Collecting Screw
Driven Roller
Cleaning Blade 4038T2C164AA
Figure 2-40. Transfer Belt cleaning

Confidential
2ND TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING CHARGE NEUTRALIZATION AND SEPARATION OF PAPER
In order to remove the remaining toner on the 2nd Transfer Roller, DC In order to remove the residual potential on the paper with the 2nd Image
charge is applied to transfer the remaining toner on the 2nd Transfer Roller transferred, the neutralization material is applied to the guide plate without
to the Transfer Belt. contact after the 2nd Transfer Roller.
The Cleaning Blade then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the In order to separate the paper from the Transfer Belt without fail after the
Transfer Belt. 2nd Image Transfer, a Transfer Belt Separation Claw is mounted (one point.)
Transfer Belt 2nd Transfer Roller Separation Claw
Transfer Belt
- - - -
--
- --
Charge Neutralizing Cloth

Cleaning Blade - + HV1
4038T2C161AA
2nd Transfer Roller
Figure 2-41. 2nd Transfer Roller cleaning 4038T2C173AA
Figure 2-42. Charge Neutralization and Separation of Paper
Operation timing DETECTION OF NEW TRANSFER BELT UNIT
When the image stabilization control is performed. When Transfer Belt Unit is replaced with new one, the new unit detection
When the printer is recovered from the JAM error. is made by engine side and Life counter value is reset automatically.
The new unit detection is made when the Power Switch is turned ON and
the Right Door is opened and closed.
Power OFF/ON, Right door Open/ Transfer Auto Transfer Voltage

Close Control Adjustment
Check Transfer Belt Unit being Image Stabilization

mounted
Check detection of the new unit Perform the initial operation for
(24V energizing) Transfer Belt
Figure 2-43. Timing for New Unit Detection/Operation

Confidential
2.2.10 Toner Collecting section

2.2.10.1 Composition
PU Toner Collecting Screw
Transfer Belt Toner Collecting Screw
Waste Toner Collector

4039T2C11AA
4038T2C023DA
Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8)
Waste Toner Conveyance Screw

4038T2C110AA
4038T2C024DA

Confidential
TONER COLLECTING MECHANISM

Main Motor (M1)
Toner collected by the Cleaning Blade of the Transfer Belt and waste toner in
each of the Photoconductor Units are conveyed by the corresponding Toner
Collecting Screws to the Waste Toner Collector.
PU Toner Collecting Screw PU Toner Collecting Screw
Cleaning Blade
Transfer Belt Toner

Collecting Screw

4038T2C023DA
Figure 2-46. Toner collecting mechanism

Transfer Belt Toner
Collecting Screw WASTE TONER COLLECTOR SET DETECTION
4038T2C025DA
The Waste Toner Full Detection Signal on the Water Toner Full Sensor
Figure 2-45. Drive overview (PC8) detects Set/Unset of the Waste Toner Collector.
Set/Unset of the Waste Toner Collector is detected when the front door is
closed with the Main Power Switch being ON. The printing will stop when
the Waste Toner Collector is not set.

Confidential
WASTE TONER NEAR-FULL/FULL DETECTION CONTROL
Waste Toner Detection Mechanism

To prevent false detection, an Agitation Screw is mounted in the Waste
Toner Collector so that the waste toner is accumulated in the bottle
evenly.
The Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8) detects the area where the visor A
mounted on the shaft of the Toner Conveying Screw overlaps with the
visor B. (As the amount of the waste toner increases, the load for the 4038T2C116AA
screw to rotate will increase. The period of time the Light Shield Plate
blocks the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8) will then become shorter). Light Shield Plate A
Light Shield Plate B

Waste Toner Collector Agitator Screw
4038T2C174AA
Light Shield Plate A Torsion Coil Spring

4038T2C176AA
Waste Toner Empty Waste Toner Full
4038T2C175AA
Light Shield Plate B

4038T2C177AA 4038T2C178AA
Figure 2-48. Waste Toner Detection Mechanism 2

Figure 2-47. Waste Toner Detection Mechanism 1

Confidential
2.2.11 Paper feed section (Standard Cassette)

Std. cassette Device

Detection Sensor (PC12) Std. cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
Std. cassette Paper Near-Empty Sensor Std. cassette Paper Empty Sensor (PC10)
(PC11) Std. cassette Feed Roller
Std. cassette Separation Roller
4038T2C111AA
4039T2C113AA
Registration Roller Sensor (PC1)

Std. cassette CD Paper Size Sensor
Standard cassette Feed Roller Std. cassette Paper Size (PC9)
Board (PWB-I) 4038T2C026DB
Standard cassette
Separation Roller
4038T2C172AA
Figure 2-49. Paper feed section (MP tray)

Confidential
2.2.11.2 Drive PAPER NEAR-EMPTY/PAPER EMPTY DETECTION
Main Motor (M1) When the Standard cassette Paper Near-empty Sensor is blocked, a
corresponding warning display is given on the control panel.
The Standard cassette Paper Empty Sensor detects a paper empty
condition.
A Near-empty Condition An Empty Condition
Std. cassette Feed Roller
Std. cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
4036ma2038c1
4038T2C027DA
4036ma2116c0
Std. cassette Paper Near-empty Sensor Std. cassette Paper Empty Sensor
(PC11) (PC10)
Figure 2-51. Paper Near-Empty/Paper Empty detection
2.2.11.3 Operation
PAPER TAKE-UP CONTROL

Start Key ON Registration Roller ON
Main Motor (M1)
Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
Registration Roller Clutch (CL1)

4038T2C138AA

Confidential
PAPER SIZE DETECTION CONTROL

Paper Size Board (PWB-I)
Paper width/length are detected to determine the paper size from their 4 3 2 1
combination.
Table 2-1. Paper size detection control (Standard Cassette)
Paper Size Board (PWB-I)
Paper Size CD Paper Size Sensor (PC9)
1 2 3 4
Guide
A6R ON OFF ON OFF H
A5 ON OFF ON OFF L
B6R OFF ON OFF ON H
B5 OFF ON OFF ON L 4036ma2042c1
A5R OFF OFF ON OFF H Figure 2-52. Paper size detection control
A4 OFF OFF ON OFF L
B5R ON ON OFF OFF H
B5R* OFF ON OFF OFF H PAPER INTERVAL CONTROL
OFF ON ON OFF H
ON ON ON OFF H It sets the proper interval between papers (pitch) according to the paper size
A4R OFF OFF OFF ON L
and mode for multiple printing.
A4R* OFF OFF OFF OFF L Basic Paper Interval Control
B4 ON ON ON OFF L s
A3 ON ON ON ON L
A3 Wide OFF ON ON ON L
Paper feed direction
Note * : This combination will also be used due to the sensor's ability.
H: Blocking Space
L : Unblocking between
papers
Paper interval
4038T2C194AA
Figure 2-53. Paper Interval Control

Confidential
2.2.12 Bypass section (MP tray)

MP tray Feed Roller
(Bypass)
Paper Lifting Plate MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13)
MP tray Separation Roller 4038T2C181AA
4039T2C114AA
MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13) Paper Side Plate
4038T2C112AA
Paper Side Plate

Confidential

MP tray Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
PAPER TAKE-UP CONTROL
Start Key ON Move to Standby Position
Main Motor (M1)

MP tray Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL2)
MP tray Lift-up Sensor (PC14)
4038T2C142AA
PAPER EMPTY DETECTION

MP tray Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL2) 4038T2C113AA
The MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13) detects a paper empty condition in
the Bypass Section.
MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13)

Paper Lifting Cam
MP tray Feed Roller (Bypass) 4038T2C114AA

Main Motor (M1)
When there is no paper
4039T2C116AA

When the paper is fully supplied
4038T2C182AA
Figure 2-56. Paper Empty detection

Confidential
PAPER LIFTING MOTION CONTROL Registration Roller
It turns the MP tray Pick-Up Solenoid (SL2) ON when the MP tray paper
feed is started. The Lifting Cam will rotate to move the Paper Lifting plate
up to the feeding position.
When the printing is finished, the MP tray Pick-Up Solenoid (SL2) will be
ON again. The Paper Lifting Cam will then rotate to move the Paper
Lifting plate down to the waiting position.
The Paper Lifting plate will stay at the feeding position while the job is
being executed. It will move down to the waiting position when the job is
finished and no following printing is demanded.
If a paper misfeed occurs, the Paper Lifting Plate is lowered to its standby
position during pre-drive performed after the misfed sheet of paper has
been cleared and the door has been closed.
The position of the Paper Lifting Plate is detected by the detection plate
which is mounted coaxially with the Paper Lifting Plate, and also by the
MP tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC14). Registration Roller Clutch (CL1) 4038T2C113AA
Operation timing OHP Sensor (PC4)

Start Key ON Move to Standby Position
MP tray Feed Roller (Bypass)
Main Motor (M1)
4038T2C142AA
4038T2C183AA
Figure 2-57. MP tray paper lifting motion control

Confidential
2.2.13 Registration Roller section 2.2.13.3 Operation
2.2.13.1 Composition REGISTRATION ROLLER CONTROL

Registration Roller
The followings are controlled.
The paper will create a loop between the Feed Roller and the Registration
Roller when the paper is being conveyed in order to correct the skew.
The Registration Roller Clutch (CL1) is controlled in order to synchronize
the timing the unit starts writing the image and conveying paper.
Registration Roller
4038T2C118AA
Registration Roller OHP Sensor (PC4) OHP Sensor (PC4)

Clutch (CL1)
4039T2C118AA
Registration Roller
Sensor (PC1)
2.2.13.2 Drive Feed Roller
Registration Roller
Registration Roller
Clutch (CL1) Paper
Loop
4038T2C186AA
Feed Roller
4038T2C185AA
4038T2C031DA Figure 2-60. Registration Roller control


Confidential
OHP DETECTION DECELERATION CONTROL
OHP Sensor (PC4) checks to prevent printing on the paper other than OHP. It controls the timing the paper reaches to the Registration Roller Sensor (PC1).
OHP detection will be performed before paper made the loop at the The Vertical Transport Motor (Vertical Transport Roller) for each tray will
Registration Roller. When the OHP detection shows the different result from slow down its operation in order to adjust the speed of the paper being
the setting on the operation panel, printing will stop to display "Media Error". conveyed.
Table 2-2. OHP detection

Results of OHP
Paper type set from
Sensor (PC4) Operation
control panel
Detection
OHP Other than OHP Determines that there is mismatch of paper type,
Other than OHP OHP bringing all mechanisms to an immediate stop.
"Media Error" will be displayed on the panel.
OHP Sensor (PC4)
Optional Cassette Vertical Transport Roller
Optional Cassette Vertical Transport Roller
4038T2C190AA
Figure 2-62. Deceleration Control

4038T2C185AA
Figure 2-61. OHP detection 2

Confidential
2.2.14 Fusing section Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1)

Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) Heating Roller Thermistor/3 (TH4)
Fusing Pressure Roller Fusing Pressure Roller

Thermistor /1 (TH2) Thermistor /1 (TH2)
4038T2C153AA 4038T2C154AA
Heating Roller Thermostat (TS1)

4038T2C119AA
4039T2C119AA
Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) Heating Pressure Fusing Pressure Roller Fusing Pressure Roller Thermostat (TS2)
Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) Roller Roller Heater Lamp (H3)
4038T2C155AA

Heating Roller Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermostat (TS1) Thermostat (TS2)
Heating Roller
Thermistor/3 (TH4)
4038T2C191AA
Heating Roller Heater Lamp/2 (H2) Fusing Pressure Roller

Thermistor /1 (TH2)
Heating Roller Heater Lamp/1 (H1)
Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor /2 (TH5)

Confidential
2.2.14.2 Drive Fusing Loop Control

Fusing Drive Motor (M4) By creating a paper loop, the speed difference between the fusing and
paper conveyance at 2nd transfer part will be adjusted. It prevents the
double transferred image or brush effect.
Heating Roller OFF ON
4038T2C034DA

2.2.14.3 Operation Fusing Loop Detect Sensor (PC3)
FUSING ROLLER DRIVE CONTROL

4038T2C195AA
Fusing Roller Speed Change Control
Figure 2-66. Fusing Loop Control
The Fusing Roller (Heating Roller/Fusing Pressure Roller) is driven by
the Fusing Motor (M4). The Fusing Motor (M4) drives the Heating
Roller. The Fusing Pressure Roller rotates along with the Heating
Roller.
In order to avoid fusing error, the rotation speed of the Fusing Roller is
to be set to one of 2 levels according to the paper type or the print mode.
Table 2-3. Rotation speed of the Fusing Roller
Paper Type/Print Mode Fusing Speed
Plain paper/Monochrome Normal speed
Plain paper/Color Normal speed
Thick paper Low speed
OHP transparencies Low speed

Confidential
HEATER LAMP CONSTRUCTION Heating Roller Thermistor

Table 2-5. Heating Roller Thermistor Construction
Three heater lamps are controlled to be turned ON/OFF so the temperature of
Name Symbol Function
the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller will stay appropriate to
completely fuse the image. The main thermistor which detects the temperature at
Heating Roller Thermistor/1 TH1
the center of the Heating Roller
Heater Lamp Construction The sub-thermistor which detects the temperature at the
The Heating Roller has two heaters with different heat quantities and light edge of the Heating Roller
distributions. The protection thermistor which detects the abnormally
high temperature of the Heating Roller
Table 2-4. Heater Lamp Construction
Light TH1 TH3 TH4
emission
Light will emit to heat to the edge of the
Heating Roller Heater Lamp/1 H1 Long
roller Heating Roller
Light will emit to heat only the center of
Heating Roller Heater Lamp/2 H3 Short
the roller 4038T2C156AA 4038T2C158AA
Pressure Heater Lamp Construction Figure 2-67. Heating Roller Thermistor

The Pressure Roller has the Pressure Roller Heater Lamp (H2) to heat up. Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor
Table 2-6. Pressure Roller Thermistor Construction
THERMISTOR CONSTRUCTION
The Fusing Roller (Heating/Fusing Pressure) has five Thermistors. (Three on Fusing Pressure Roller The main thermistor which detects the temperature at
TH2
the Heating Roller, two on the Fusing Pressure Roller.) Thermistor/1 the center of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Fusing Pressure Roller The protection thermistor which detects the abnormally
TH5
Thermistor/2 high temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller
TH5
TH2 4038T2C159AA
4038T2C157AA
Figure 2-68. Fusing Pressure Thermistor

Confidential
THERMOSTAT CONSTRUCTION Leaving the printer for 30 days or more with the Release lever
The Fusing Drive Roller has two thermostats. (One on the Heating Roller and one on placed in the normal position will deform the pressing part of
the Fusing Pressure Roller) Fusing Roller. Deformed Roller may cause "Uneven Gross"
When the temperature of the Fusing Roller increases abnormally high, the or other image troubles when printing images with high
Thermostat will detect it and shut down the power supplied to the heater lamp. This density (high duty image) such as photographs.
controls the High Temperature Protection/Thermostat Protection. Therefore, be sure to switch the Release lever to the
"Envelope" position when leaving the printer for a long
FUSING ROLLER PRESSURE/RETRACTION MECHANISM period of time.
The Pressure Roller is always pressed to the Heating Roller (Normal Paper jam countermeasure position
position). By switching the Release lever to the position Fusing Pressure Roller will
By switching the Release lever, the pressure of the Fusing Pressure Roller can retract from the Heating Roller as shown below.
Paper jam release mechanism is equipped for removing the stuck paper.
be switched between Envelope position/Paper jam countermeasure position.
Normal position Paper jam release
Envelope position (Normal pressure) position (No pressure)
By switching the Release lever to the lower direction shown below, the
pressure of the Fusing Pressure Roller will be Envelope position.
Envelope position is for preventing the wrinkle when feeding Envelopes. Release lever
To switch from Envelope position to the normal position, move up the
Release lever to the normal position.
Normal position Envelope position
(Normal pressure) (Low pressure)
Release lever
4038T2C199AA 4038T2C201AA
Figure 2-70. Paper jam countermeasure position 1
4038T2C200AA
4038T2C199AA
Figure 2-69. Envelope position

Confidential
Close the Fusing cover when switching the position from Paper jam release to FUSING ROLLER SMALL AMOUNT ROTATION CONTROL
the normal. Closing the Fusing cover will return the Release lever to the
normal position. Leaving the printer in the "low-power mode" for a long period of time may
deform the pressing part of the Fusing Roller due to the heat and pressure
Fusing Cover
(Deformed Roller may cause "Uneven Gross" or other image troubles when
printing the high duty image).
To prevent such Deformed Roller, rotate the Fusing Roller slightly and change
Release lever the pressing part of the roller when a standby state in the low-power mode lasts
for fixed time.
4038T2C202AA
Figure 2-71. Paper jam countermeasure position 2
The Release lever must be closed by closing the Fusing cover.
Pressing position
4038T2C203AA

Confidential
PAPER WINDING DETECTION CONTROL
With the roller fusing type Fusing Unit, paper jam may cause the paper to wind
itself to the Fusing Roller. This Winding Detection control monitors the paper
to detect when it winds itself to the roller lightly so that it can be removed
easily.
Operations are explained below.
It detects the winding before the roller is completely covered. (The length
of the paper wound to the roller is shorter than the circumference of the
roller.) The back-edge of the paper is sticking out from under the Fusing
Unit and can be removed.
When the paper jam occurs, rotating the Fusing Motor (M4) will make the
paper stuck to the Fusing Roller even worse, so the unit will stop
immediately.
4038T2C196AA
Paper
Figure 2-72. Paper Winding Detection Control

Confidential
FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN THE LOW-POWER MODE
When with Plain paper, A4 paper (horizontal), single-side 5 sheets, or when It adjusts the temperature by turning the controlled temperature down to reduce
above the specified temperature inside the printer with the Main Power Switch the power consumption in standby.
turned ON
Table 2-8. Control target temperature
Warm-up Completed Control target
Name Symbol
Printing temperature
Power Switch ON Start Key ON complete Standby mode
Heating Roller Thermistor/1 TH1 140 C
Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 TH2 140 C
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
200
PROTECTING FROM THE ABNORMALLY HIGH TEMPERATURE
The machine provides protection against abnormally high temperature of the

Fusing Unit in the following three steps.
Table 2-9. Protection against abnormally high temperature

Step Name Control target temperature
This protection operates when abnormally high
Step 1 Software Protection
temperature is detected.
0 4038T2C144AA Move to the protection in step 2 when the protection
*110 sec.
Step 2 Hardware Protection
Note * : When turning the Sub Power ON from the stable condition of Main Power ON/ in step 1 is not executed.
Sub Power OFF with rated voltage. Move to the protection in step 3 when the protection
Step 3 Thermostat Protection
in step 2 is not executed
Table 2-7. Fusing Temperature Control

No. Status
DETECTION OF A NEW FUSING UNIT
Warming-up the unit
(Above the specified temperature when the Power is turned ON) When the new Fusing Unit is replaced, the new one is detected in the
[1]
Warming-up engine side and the life counter value is automatically reset.
(Below the specified temperature when the Power is turned ON)
The new Fusing Unit will be detected when the door is closed and the Main
[2] In standby state
Power Switch is turned ON.
[3] Printing
[4] In standby state
[5] Low-power mode

Confidential
2.2.15 Paper exit section 2.2.15.2 Drive
2.2.15.1 Composition Fusing Drive Motor

(M4)
Paper Exit Roller/1
4039T2C125AA
Paper Exit Roller 4039T2C127AA
4039T2C120AA Figure 2-74. Drive overview
Paper Exit Roller
Charge
Neutralizing
Brush Exit Sensor
4038T2C192AA

Confidential
2.2.16 Image stabilization control 2.2.16.2 Operation timing

Stabilizes printed images by adjusting developing bias potential and laser Table 2-11. Image stabilization control
intensity. Also, to prevent color misalignment, control the registration Mode Operation timing
correction. Mode 1 A new PU is detected.
Initialized A new transfer belt unit is detected.
stabilization
2.2.16.1 Overview "Calibration" of the Printer Adjust Menu is executed from the operation
panel.
The machine provides the following image stabilization control to maintain the Empty is released.
printed image quality. Previous image stabilization is failed.
Table 2-10. Image stabilization control Mode 2 The number of prints made predetermined counts after the previous image
Periodical stabilization (mode 1, 2, 3).
Purpose Control Control Means stabilization
To stabilize image density IDC intensity control IDC/Registration Sensor Mode 3 Power switch is turned ON, right cover is opened and closed (only when
To stabilize gradation Max. density control Temperature/Humidity Normal PU and transfer belt are new), front door is opened and closed, the DEEP
LD intensity adjustment Control Sensor stabilization SLEEP mode is released, panel displays stabilization mode.
Registration control (color shift The number of prints made predetermined counts after the previous image
correction)*1 stabilization (mode 1, 3).
Gamma correction control When the number of prints made predetermined counts after the previous
image stabilization (mode 1, 2, 3), temperature change that exceeds
To stabilize toner density TCR Control (Y,M,C,K)*2 TCR Sensor threshold is detected.
To stabilize image transfer Image transfer output control*3 Temperature/Humidity When the number of prints made predetermined counts after the previous
1st image transfer auto transfer Sensor image stabilization (mode 1, 2, 3), environment (temperature/humidity)
voltage control change that exceeds threshold is detected.
2nd image transfer auto transfer When the print job is completed, given level of temperature change* is
voltage control detected.
When the print job is completed, environment (temperature/humidity)
Note *1: Refer to Registration Control (Color Shift Correction) System (p40).
change that exceeds threshold is detected after the previous stabilization
*2: Refer to TCR Sensor control (p50). (mode 1, 2, 3).
*3: Refer to Auto Transfer Voltage Control (p61).

Confidential
2.2.17 Life management

The following table shows the information about the life of consumable products and periodic replacement parts.
Panel display continued
Parts attributed Image New unit detection
Type Unit Status Life detection Error Solution on Dictate Unit
life Message quality (Reset counter)
LED printing
Consumable Toner Cartridge Near- The toner supplying amount is calculated from the Toner Supply uuuu Toner Low --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty The life counter is IC chip in
products Empty hours which the Toner Supply Motor has turned. Motor automatically reset if the cartridge
When the amount reaches the given value, the the newly installed
condition becomes Near-Empty.
cartridge is judged as
Empty When the printer is under Near-Empty condition, TCR Sensor Replace Toner Light Replace with a new unit Not --- new by checking the
the toner density detected by the TCR sensor is uuuu Available "new" status of the
compared with the target toner density. When the flag stored in the IC
density difference reaches the given level, condition
chip on the cartridge.
becomes Empty.
Photoconductor Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty when any of the Main Motor Photocon uuuu --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty The life counter is IC chip in
Unit Empty following values reaches the given value. Color PC motor Needed Soon automatically reset if the cartridge
Rotating time of the PC Drum Color the newly installed
Rotating time of the PC Drum which calculated from Developing cartridge is judged as
the hours which the Developing Roller has turned. Motor new by checking the
Empty Condition becomes Empty when any of the Replace Flash [READY] Push down the Available Out of "new" status of the
following values reaches the given value. Photocon uuuu switch to Eco-printing warranty flag stored in the IC
Rotating time of the PC Drum mode chip on the cartridge.
Rotating time of the PC Drum which calculated from
the hours which the Developing Roller has turned.
Eco- Under Eco-printing mode, printer will suspend --- Replace --- [READY] Push down Available Out of
printing when the specified number of papers are printed. Photocon uuuu the switch to continue warranty
Eco-printing mode
mode
Replace with a new unit
Empty 2 Condition becomes Empty 2 when any of the Main Motor Replace Light Replace with a new unit Not ---
following values reaches the given value. Color Pc Motor Photocon uuuu Available
Rotating time of the PC Drum Color
Rotating time of the PC Drum which calculated from Developing
the hours which the Developing Roller has turned. Motor
Waste Toner Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty when the time Waste Toner Full Waste Toner Box --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty NO New unit Waste Toner
Collector Empty for photo interrupter sensor to detect two Light Sensor Near Full detection mechanism Full Sensor
Shield Plates mounted on a rotating shaft of the
Agitator screw in the Waste Toner Collector
reaches within the range of the given value.
Empty Condition becomes Empty when the time for Replace Waste Light Replace with a new unit Not ---
photo interrupter sensor to detect two Light Toner Box Available
Shield Plates mounted on a rotating shaft of the
Agitator screw in the Waste Toner Collector
reaches within the range of the given value.

Confidential
Panel display continued

Parts attributed Image New unit detection
Type Unit Status Life detection Error Solution on Dictate Unit
life Message quality (Reset counter)
LED printing
Periodic Fusing Unit Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty when any of the Fusing Motor Fuser Needed --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty When Fuse for new Detection for
replacement Empty following values reaches the given value. Soon unit detection is connector
parts Number of prints (Paper more than 216 mm in conducted, unit is connection
Sub Scan Direction is two counts) judged as new unit
Value of the hours which the Fusing Motor has
and counter is reset
turned is converted into the number of prints
automatically.
Near- Condition becomes Empty 2 when any of the Replace Fuser --- Change to Empty --- ---
Empty 2 following values reaches the given value. condition by receiving
Number of prints (Paper more than 216 mm in job.
Sub Scan Direction is two counts)
Value of the hours which the Fusing Motor has
turned converted into the number of prints
Empty Condition becomes Empty when the print job is --- Replace Fuser Flash Continue on printing Available Out of
received in the condition of Near-Empty 2 by pushing down warranty
[Start/Stop] to disable
the error*.
Empty 2 Condition becomes Empty 2 when number of --- Replace Fuser Light Replace with a new unit Not ---
prints reach the given numbers to print. Available
Transfer Belt Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty when the hours Main Motor Transfer Unit --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty When Fuse for new 1st Image
Unit Empty which the Transfer Belt has turned reached the Needed Soon unit detection is Transfer
given time. conducted, unit is Pressure
Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty 2 when the Replace Transfer --- Change to Empty --- --- judged as new unit Retraction
Empty 2 hours which the Transfer Belt has turned reached Unit condition by receiving and counter is reset Sensor
the given time. job. automatically.
Empty Condition becomes Empty when the print job is --- Replace Transfer Flash Continue on printing Available Out of
received in the condition of Near-Empty 2 Unit by pushing down warranty
[Start/Stop] to disable
the error.
Maintenance Unit/ Near- Condition becomes Near-Empty when number of Feed Roller/ Replace --- Prepare a new unit Available Warranty Reset the counter None
Feed Roller/ Empty prints reach the given value (count is paper-size Separation Roller Maintenance manually from
Separation Roller independent). Unit/Replace Maintenance Menu.
Feed Roller xx
Empty Condition becomes Empty when number of prints Replace Flash Continue on printing Available Out of
reach the given value (count is paper-size Maintenance by pushing down warranty
independent). Unit/Replace [Start/Stop] to disable
the error.
Feed Roller xx
Note * : Continuing on printing is available until the power is turned OFF. When the Power is turned ON again, the status will become Near-Empty.

Confidential
2.3 Operating principle of Option mechanism

Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC1-PC)
2.3.1 Optional Cassette Lift-up Motor (M3-PC) Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
2.3.1.1 Composition Device Detection Sensor
(PC2-PC) Paper Take-up Sensor (PC9-PC)
Feed Roller
Paper Empty Sensor

(PC6-PC)
Control Board
(PWB-Z-PC)
Lift-up Sensor (PC7-PC)
Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)
Separation Roller 4038T2C127AA
4037T2C532AA
CD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC3- CD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC4-PC)
PC)
Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC8-PC) Figure 2-76. Composition 2
Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC)
Feed Roller
Vertical Transport
Roller/2
4038T2C172AA
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Operating principle of Option mechanism 85

Confidential
2.3.1.2 Drive PAPER SUPPLY LEVEL DETECTION CONTROL

Paper Feed Roller Paper supply level is indicated in the window of the Cassette Front Cover.
(Only for the Optional Cassette)
Lift-up Motor Vertical Transport Roller When the Paper Lifting Plate goes up, in conjunction with its position, the
(M3-PC)
Red Lever appears in the window. Red area appeared in the window
indicates paper supply level, and their relationship is as follows.
Decreasing Paper Supply Level Increasing the area of the Red

Feed Roller Lever appeared in the window
Lifting Plate
Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
4038T2C028DA
4038T2C216AA
4038T2C215AA
Figure 2-77. Drive overview Paper Supply Level Indicator in Cassette Front Cover Lever
Figure 2-78. Controlling for Paper Supply Level
PAPER NEAR-EMPTY/PAPER EMPTY DETECTION

A Near-empty Condition An Empty Condition
Paper Near-empty Sensor (PC1-PC) Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC)
Lift-up Motor
(M3-PC)
4036ma2017c1 4036ma2612c0
Figure 2-79. Paper Near-Empty/Paper Empty detection

Confidential
Table 2-12. Paper size detection control (Optional Cassette)

Optional Cassette Optional Cassette Optional Cassette Paper Size Board (PWB-I)
Paper Size Paper Size Board (PWB-I) CD Size Sensor/1 CD Size Sensor/2
4 3 2 1
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 (PC4-PC) (PC3-PC)
A3 ON/
ON ON ON H L
OFF
B4 ON ON ON OFF H L
A4R ON/ Guide
OFF ON ON L H
OFF
A4 ON/
OFF OFF OFF H L
OFF
B5R OFF OFF ON OFF L L
4036ma2043c1
B5 ON ON OFF OFF H L
A5R ON/
OFF OFF OFF L L Figure 2-80. Paper size detection control
OFF
11 x 17 ON OFF ON ON H H
Legal ON ON ON OFF L H
Letter R ON OFF OFF ON L H
Letter OFF OFF OFF OFF H H
Note H : Blocking
L : Unblocking

Confidential
PAPER LIFTING MOTION CONTROL
When Tray is slid in During a print cycle

When the Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC) of the Optional Cassette is When the amount of paper decreases as the Unit keeps printing, the
unblocked (OFF) with the Optional Cassette being closed, the Lift-Up Feed Roller will gradually come down to unblock the Lift-Up Sensor
Motor (M3-PC) of the Optional Cassette will rotate to start lifting up (PC7-PC) of the Optional Cassette. The Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC) will
the Paper Lifting Plate. rotate again to lift up the Paper Lifting Plate.
When the Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC) of the Optional Cassette is blocked When the Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC) is blocked (ON), the Lift-Up
(ON) after the Paper Lifting Plate starts moving up, the Lift-Up Motor Motor (M3-PC) of the Optional Cassette will stop to finish lifting the
(M3-PC) of the Optional Cassette will stop to finish lifting the Paper Paper Lifting Plate.
Lifting Plate. The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep constant the
pressure between the Paper Take-up Roller and paper stack (paper
Lift-up Motor (M3-PC) Lift-up Sensor (PC7-PC) take-up pressure) regardless of the amount of paper still available for
use.
Paper Lifting Plate

4036ma2232c0
4036ma2607c0
Figure 2-81. Paper lifting motion control of the Optional Cassette 4036ma2232c0
(When Tray is slid in) 4036ma2233c0
Figure 2-82. Paper lifting motion control of the Optional Cassette (During a print cycle)
Timing for Motion
Slid in Lifting Completed
Set Sensor (PC2-PC)

Lift-up Motor (M3-PC)
4038T2C141AA

Confidential
2.3.2 Duplex Unit

2.3.2.1 Composition
Switchback section
Switchback to Main Body
Paper is fed into the main body again
Transport section
4066T1J500DA
4066T2C514DA
Figure 2-83. Composition Figure 2-84. Paper Feed Path

Confidential
2.3.2.2 Drive TRANSPORT DRIVE
SWITCHBACK DRIVE Duplex Control Board Duplex Unit Transport Roller 1

(PWB-A DU)
Duplex Unit
Switchback Motor (M1 DU)
Main Body
Duplex Unit Transport Roller 2
Paper Exit Roller/1 Duplex Unit Transport

Motor (M2 DU)
Paper Exit Roller/2 Duplex Unit Transport Roller 3
4066T2C517DA

Confidential
2.3.2.3 Operation Paper Exit Roller drive coupling mechanism

When the Duplex Unit is mounted, the tip of the Duplex Unit Lever raises
SWITCHBACK MECHANISM the Idle Lever to cut off the drive from the main body (Fusing Rollers) and
the Paper Exit Roller is driven by the Switchback Motor.
Switchback operation
The Paper Exit Roller of the main body is used to subject the 1-sided print Switchback Motor (M1 DU)
Idle Lever Duplex Unit
to a switchback sequence so that the 1-sided print is to be transported Lever
through the Duplex Unit.
Paper Exit Roller/1
Paper Exit
Roller/2
Paper Exit Roller/1
Transporting the Paper into

Duplex Unit Paper Exit Roller/2
4066T2C516DA
Switchback operation
4066T2C518DA
Figure 2-87. Paper Exit Roller drive coupling mechanism
Switchback Motor Control

Rotation of the Switchback Motor is controlled by the signals output from
the Duplex Control Board.

Confidential
TRANSPORT CONTROL 4. The main body carries out the second print cycle to
produce the print image of the first page of the original on
Rotation speed of the Duplex Unit Transport Motor is controlled by the signals the other side of the 1-sided print.
1 2
output from the Duplex Control Board.

The following two types of printing methods are available.
4066T2C504DA
Operations in 2-sided printing with a single sheet of paper resident in the
system 5. The paper of 2-sided print is exited.
1. The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the Paper Exit Roller
Operations in 2-sided printing with more than two papers
Main Body Drawer and the Main Body starts the first print
1. The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the Paper Exit Roller
cycle to produce the print image of the second page of the
Main Body Drawer and the Main Body starts the first print
original. 2 cycle to produce the print image of the second page of the
original. 2
4066T2C501DA
4066T2C506DA
2. Immediately before the 1-sided print leaves the Paper Exit
2
Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit Roller is 2. Immediately before the first 1-sided print leaves the Paper
reversed and the 1-sided print is transported toward and Exit Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit
2
into the Duplex Unit. Roller is reversed and the first 1-sided print is transported
toward and into the Duplex Unit.
4066T2C502DA 3. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is taken up and
3. The 1-sided print moves through the Duplex Unit and is fed into the main body. 4066T2C507DA
directly subject to the second print cycle without being

stopped. 2
4. The Main Body carries out the first print cycle for the
second sheet of paper to produce the print image of the 4
fourth page of the original. 2
4066T2C503DA 5. At the same time, the first 1-sided print is transported

through the Duplex Unit.
4066T2C508DA

Confidential
6. The Main Body produces the print image of the first page 16. While feeding the second 2-sided print out, the Main Body 4
of the original on the first 1-sided print that has been fed produces the print image of the 8th page of the original on 3 2
1 2
through the Duplex Unit. 4
the fourth sheet of paper. 1
8 6
7. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is subjected to 17. The third sheet of paper will wait in front of the Duplex
a switchback sequence at the exit section and fed into the 6 Unit Transport Roller 3 until the fourth sheet of paper has
Duplex Unit. 4066T2C509DA operated switch back sequence. 4066T2C513DA
8. At the same time, the third sheet of paper is taken up and

fed into the main body. 18. Steps 11 through 17 are repeated.
9. While feeding the first 2-sided print out, main body

2
produces the print image of the 6th page of the original on
1
the third sheet of paper.
10. The second sheet of paper waits before the Duplex Unit 6
Transport Motor 3 until the third sheet of paper switches 4
back. 4066T2C510DA
11. Immediately before the first 1-sided print leaves the Paper
6
Exit Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit 2
Roller is reversed and the first 1-sided print for the third 1
sheet is transported toward and into the Duplex Unit.
4
12. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is fed into the
Main Body. 4066T2C511DA
13. The Main Body carries out the first print cycle for the
second sheet of paper to produce the print image of the 2 3 4
third page of the original. 1 6
14. At the same time, the first 1-sided print for the third is
transported through the Duplex Unit.
15. At the same time, the forth sheet of paper is taken up and 4066T2C512DA
fed into the Main Body.

Confidential
2.4 Other Control 2.4.1.2 Function

Table 2-13. Function
2.4.1 Fan Control Motor Name Control Conditions

Power Supply It exhausts the accumulated heat inside the unit in order to prevent
2.4.1.1 Construction Cooling Fan Motor/1 temperature from increasing at DC power supply part and the controller
(M8) part.
Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) Ozone Ventilation A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor (M13) Fan Motor (M14) the PC Drum due to ozone accumulated around the PC Drum Charge
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11) Corona. In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes the ozone
inside the PC Drum Charge Corona to keep the sensitivity of the PC
Drum.
Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12)
Ozone accumulated around the PC Drum Charge Corona will be
absorbed by Ozone filter and be removed.
Fusing Cooling Fan Odor accumulated between TC part and Fusing part is absorbed by the
Motor/1 (M13) odor filter to be removed.
In order to keep the temperature between TC part and fusing part as well
as motor part, heat accumulated inside the unit will be exhausted.
Fusing Cooling Fan When the paper with toner heated at fusing part exit while still at high
Motor/2 (M11) temperature, toner may be transferred to other paper on the exit tray.
In order to avoid this, air is applied to cool the toner and paper.
Suction Fan Motor Paper will be sucked between 2nd Transfer part and fusing part, so it will
(M10) have a stable behavior and go smoothly into the Fusing Roller. The air
inside will be exhausted outside the unit.
A Dust Filter/Vertical Transfer are mounted inside the Ventilation Duct
in order to remove dust the Suction Fan sucked with the air inside the
unit.
Suction Fan Motor (M10)
Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14)
Cooling Fan Motor/1 Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged in order to avoid
(M12) temperature increase, etc., inside the transfer part (Transfer Belt and
4039T2C131AA Transfer Clutch).
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1
(M8) Cooling Fan Motor/2 Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged in order to avoid
(M22) temperature increase, etc., of the upper part inside the machine as well as
around the Color PC Motor.
Figure 2-88. Construction
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Other Control 94

Confidential
2.4.2 Engine Section Parts Operated When the Main No Voltage Connected Parts
Power Switch is Turned ON AC Power Heater Lamps
1
When the Main Power Switch is turned ON, the Mechanical Control Board Supply
detects it and sends a control signal to the DC Power Supply. This turns Fan Motors, Solenoids, Clutches, Erase Lamp, Polygon Motor, 2nd
2 DC24V
ON the Sleep Relay and the DC Power Supply supplies engine section Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor, MP
parts with 3.3 VDC, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC. The Heater Relay is also turned Main Motor, PC Motor, Developing Motor, Fusing Drive Motor, Toner
3 DC24V
ON and the Fusing Heater Lamps are supplied with AC power. Supply Motor, Duplex Option, High Voltage Unit
4 DC5V CPU, ADC, Sensors, Control Panel
If Sleep is activated, the Sleep Relay is turned OFF, thus shutting off power
5 DC5V Power supply to board
supply to the engine section. Even when Sleep is activated, DC power
supply to the Controller Board is continued.
If print data is received with the Sleep Relay turned OFF, the relay is
turned ON by the signal provided by the Controller Board and power is
thereby supplied.
Main Power
Switch Sleep Relay Heater Relay
2
Front Door SW
Main DC 24V
/Right Door SW
Power Supply
3
3.3V Power supply to

board
Sub DC Power 4
Supply 5V Front Door SW
5
4039T2C133AA
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Other Control 95

Confidential
CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
3.1 Overview 3.1.2 Preliminary Check

Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully, and refer to
the troubleshooting procedures given in this chapter, the operating principles (chapter 1. The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. (Measure the
2) and the appendix (chapter 7). voltage at the electric outlet.)
C H E C K For Location (electrical parts) described from next page, 2. The POWER CORD must be free from damage, short circuit or breaking, and
P O IN T refer to 7.1 Connection Diagram (p338) should be connected properly to the power source.
3. The printer must be grounded properly.
4. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or
low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change.
3.1.1 Procedure Outline for Troubleshooting
5. The printer should not be located near waterworks, humidifiers, heaters or flames,
Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart. in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be directly exposed to air
.
Step Reference blasts from an air conditioner.

1 Verify the condition of the Information from the operator 6. The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gases
trouble Test on the printer to check the trouble status are produced.
Check the status sheet
7. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct
Check the engine status sheet
sunlight.
Check the print quality
8. The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place.
9. The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
2 Preliminary Check Refer to "3.1.2 Preliminary Check (p. 97)"
10. The paper used must conform to the specifications. (Standard paper is
recommended.)
3 Troubleshooting Refer to "3.1.4 Troubleshooting Flowchart (p. 98)" 11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
12. The periodic replacement parts must have been replaced at the right time.
13. The two firmwares for the controller and the engine controller should be the latest
4 Check if the trouble returns to
--- version.
normal
5 Preventative maintenance Refer to Chapter 6 " MAINTENANCE (p. 331)"
6 Finish ---
Troubleshooting Overview 97
Confidential
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work 3.1.4 Troubleshooting Flowchart

1. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work unless
instructed to plug it. Start
Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is

on. Never touch the power switch/inlet part even after the
power switch is turned OFF as the part is alive unless the
Is an error message (error code) displayed on the
power cord is unplugged. control panel?
2. In case of performing work with covers removed, the interlock and the safety No
switches turned ON, and the power turned ON, disconnect the connector on the Yes
PH Unit if not necessary.
Yes Fix the trouble with reference to the
In case of performing work with covers removed, the Is it a jam error code?
3.2 Jam Display (p. 99).
interlock and the safety switches turned ON, and the power
turned ON, a laser beam may be emitted from the PH Unit. No
Fix the trouble with reference to the 3.3

3. In case of performing work with covers removed, the interlock and the safety
Service Call Error (p. 107).
switches turned ON, and the power turned ON, be careful of a high voltage
supplied from the high-voltage power supply.
In case of performing work with covers removed, the

interlock and the safety switches turned ON, and the power Yes Fix the trouble with reference to the 3.4
Is it a power supply trouble? Power supply trouble (p. 134).
turned ON, never touch the high-voltage power supply and
any other high voltage output part as a high voltage may be
No
output from high voltage unit.
4. When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself. Is it an image quality Yes Fix the trouble with reference to the 3.5
problem? Image quality problem (p. 136).
5. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from body of worker.
No
Fix the trouble with reference to the Ch2 " OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p. 31)"
and Ch7 " APPENDIX (p. 337)".
Troubleshooting Overview 98
Confidential
3.2 Jam Display
3.2.1 Checking a paper jam type and jammed location

WHEN A PAPER JAM ERROR MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ON THE
CONTROL PANEL.
Find out the jammed location according to the message on the Control Panel, and
perform the related troubleshooting.
Message Jammed Location Jam processing location Reference
A cover
A, B, H Fusing/exit section B cover p.102
H cover (Fusing Unit)
A Transfer section A cover p.103
A cover
G section
A, G,
Vertical Transport E2 cover p.105
E2, E3, E4
E3 cover
E4 cover
A cover
A, G MP Tray paper feed MP tray p.104
G section
Paper Jam
Cassette 1
A, G Paper feed in the cassette 1 A cover p.104
G section
Paper feed in the first
First optional cassette unit
E2 optional cassette unit
E2 cover
Vertical Transport
Paper feed in the second
Second optional cassette unit
E3 optional cassette unit p.105
E3 cover
Vertical Transport
Paper feed in the third
Third optional cassette unit
E4 optional cassette unit
E4 cover
Vertical Transport
D, A Duplex Transport section p.106
Duplex Unit pre-registration D cover (Duplex Unit)
D, A, G p.106
section
Troubleshooting Jam Display 99

Confidential
WHEN A PAPER JAM ERROR MESSAGE IS NOT DISPLAYED ON THE

CONTROL PANEL.
Print the Error Log Sheet and find out a jam type and the jammed location referring to jam code on the sheet. The jam code is expressed in 8-digit hexadecimal and LSB is added at
the end of code.
Fourth Byte Third Byte Second, First Byte*2

Media Error Jam type Jammed Location
Hexadecimal*1 Description Hexadecimal*1 Description Hexadecimal*1 bit Binary Description
Media error
10 3F Remnant Paper Jam --- 15 10000000 00000000 Reserve
(Check Media Type)
00 No Media Error 3E Jam under Control --- 14 1000000 00000000 Reserve
2A Jam at Duplex section (cover) 2000 13 100000 00000000 Exit section
08 Jam at Exit section --- 12 10000 00000000 Reserve
Jam at Second Image Duplex Transport section
05 0800 11 1000 00000000
Transfer section (Duplex Unit Cover)
Jam at Vertical Transport in Second Image Transfer
02 0400 10 100 00000000
Lower section section
Misfeed at Duplex Section
1A --- 9 10 00000000 Reserve
(pre-registration feed)
17 Misfeed at MP tray --- 8 1 00000000 Reserve
Vertical Transport
14 Misfeed at Cassette 4 0080 7 10000000 (Vertical Transport in the
Lower Cassette)
Pre-registration Feed section
13 Misfeed at Cassette 3 0040 6 1000000
(Duplex Unit Pre-registration)
12 Misfeed at Cassette 2 0020 5 100000 Manual Paper Feed (MP tray)
11 Misfeed at Cassette 1 --- 4 10000 Reserve
00 No Jam 0008 3 1000 Fourth Paper Feed (Cassette 4)
0004 2 100 Third Paper Feed (Cassette 3)
Second Paper Feed
0002 1 10
(Cassette 2)
0001 0 1 First Paper Feed (Cassette 1)
Note *1: Values printed on the Error Log Sheet.

*2: When no applicable code is found in the above table, the paper jam is occurring at multiple points. In such case, convert the hexadecimal jam code on the Error Log Sheet into binary, and
find out combinations from the table.
Example: 0088 (hexadecimal) 00000000 10001000 (binary) 00000000 10000000 + 00000000 00001000 Vertical Transport (Vertical Transport of the lower cassette) + Fourth
paper feed (Cassette 4)

Confidential
3.2.2 Sensor layout

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1] Exit Sensor PC2

[2] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU
[4]* Registration Roller Sensor PC1
OHP Sensor PC4
[5] Vertical Transport Sensor (Optional Cassette 1) PC8-PC
[6] Paper Take-Up Sensor (Optional Cassette 1) PC9-PC
[8] Take-up Sensor (Optional Cassette 2) PC9-PC
[10] Take-up Sensor (Optional Cassette 3) PC9-PC
Note * : Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [4].

Confidential
3.2.3 Solution
INITIAL CHECK ITEMS MISFEED AT FUSING/EXIT SECTION (A, B, H)
When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items Detection Timing
Table 3-1. Initial Check Items
Table 3-2. Detection Timing
Check Item Action
Type Description
Does paper meet product specifications? Change paper.
Detection of PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after
Is paper curled, wavy, or damp. Change paper.
misfeed at Fusing/ the paper has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC2).
Instruct user in correct paper storage. Exit Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1) is not blocked even after the
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is Clean or change the paper path. lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor (PC2) has been
the paper path deformed or worn? unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or Clean or change the defective Paper Detection of paper The Exit Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned
worn? Separator Finger. left in Exit Section ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or change the defective roll/roller. reset.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at Set as necessary. Action
correct position to accommodate paper?
Are actuators found operational as checked for Correct or change the defective actuator.
Table 3-3. Action
correct operation? Relevant Electrical Parts
Exit Sensor (PC2) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Connection Diagram
Step Action Location

Control Signal (electrical
parts)
1 Initial check items --- ---
2 PC2 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14
3 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check --- U-18
4 Change PWB-A (p.312) --- ---
5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
MISFEED AT 2ND IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION (A)
Detection Timing Action

Table 3-4. Detection Timing Table 3-5. Action
Type Description Relevant Electrical Parts
Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC2) even Registration Roller Sensor (PC1)
Registration Roller Clutch (CL1)
misfeed at 2nd after the lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Exit Sensor (PC2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Transfer section Clutch (CL1) has been energized. OHP Sensor (PC4)
The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the lapse
of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Connection Diagram
Detection of paper The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Power Switch Step Action Location
Control Signal
left in 2nd Transfer is turned ON, a cover is opened and closed, or a Jam or malfunction is (electrical parts)
section reset.
The OHP Sensor (PC4) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned
2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3A to 4
ON, a cover is opened and closed, or a Jam or malfunction is reset.
3 PC2 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14
The Exit Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Image Transfer Belt Unit is
being cleaned. 4 PC4 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-6 (ON) C-4
Misfeed detected as The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not unblocked at MP tray feed 5 CL1 operation check PWB-M CNSEN-18 (ON) C-5
a result of delayed even when the lapse of a given period of time passed after it has been 6 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
deactivation of shaded by the paper.
sensor
2nd Transfer The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) has been shaded earlier than the
section Loop specified period of time after the Feed Roller started rotating to feed
Registration paper.
Reversing JAM

Confidential
MISFEED AT MP TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION (A, G) MISFEED AT CASSETTE 1 PAPER FEED SECTION (A, G)
Detection Timing Detection Timing

Table 3-6. Detection Timing Table 3-8. Detection Timing
Type Description Type Description
Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Detection of Misfeed at The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller
Misfeed at MP Tray Sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the MP Cassette 1 Paper Feed Sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
Paper Feed section Tray Feed Clutch (CL5) has been energized. section Cassette 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) has been energized.
MP Tray Paper The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not shaded even when the Cassette 1 Paper Feed The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not shaded even when the
Feed section specified period of time has passed after the Feed Roller started rotating to section specified period of time has passed after the Feed Roller started
Loop Registration feed paper from MP tray. Loop Registration rotating to feed paper from standard cassette.
Reversing JAM Reversing JAM
Action Action
Table 3-7. Action Table 3-9. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Relevant Electrical Parts
Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) Cassette 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
MP Tray Feed Clutch (CL5) Registration Roller Sensor (PC1)
Connection Diagram Connection Diagram

Step Action Location Step Action Location
Control Signal Control Signal
(electrical parts) (electrical parts)
1 Initial check items --- --- 1 Initial check items --- ---
2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4 2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4
3 CL5 operation check PWB-M CNTRY1-2 (ON) C-9 3 CL2 operation check PWB-M CNLP-13 (ON) C-11
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- --- 4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
MISFEED AT OPTIONAL CASSETTE PAPER FEED, OPTIONAL

CASSETTE VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION (A, G, E2, E3, E4)
Action
Detection Timing
Table 3-11. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Type Description
Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC) Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
Detection of Misfeed at The leading edge of the paper does not block the Vertical Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
Optional Cassette Paper Transport Sensor (PC8) even after the lapse of a given period of Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Feed section time after the Paper Feed Motor (M1) has been energized.
Detection of Misfeed at The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the Connection Diagram
Optional Cassette Vertical lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the
Transport section Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8).
Control Signal (electrical
Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8) does not transmit the paper even parts)
after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked
PC8.
2 PC9 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-8 (ON) V-22
Optional Cassette Vertical The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not shaded even when the
Transport section Loop specified period of time has passed after the Feed Roller started 3 PC8 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-11 (ON) V-22
Registration Reversing rotating to feed paper. 4 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON)) C-3 to 4
JAM
5 M1 operation check PWB-Z PC PJ5Z PC-1 to 4 Q-22
Detection of paper left in The Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) is blocked when the
Optional cassette Power Switch is turned ON, a cover is opened and closed, or a 6 Change PWB-Z (p.279) --- ---
JAM or malfunction is reset. 7 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
The Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC) is blocked when the Power
Switch is turned ON, a cover is opened and closed, or a JAM or
malfunction is reset.

Confidential
MISFEED AT DUPLEX TRANSPORT SECTION (DUPLEX OPTION) (D, A) JAM AT DUPLEX PRE-REGISTRATION SECTION (DUPLEX UNIT) (D, A,
G)
Detection Timing
Detection Timing
Type Description
Type Description
Detection of The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2) is not blocked even after the
misfeed at Duplex lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Detection of Misfeed at The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the
Transport section Transport Sensor 1 (PC1). Duplex pre-registration lapse of a given period of time after a Duplex paper feed sequence
section has been started.
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1) is not unblocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Detection of Loop The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not shaded even when the
Registration Reversing specified period of time has passed after the Feed Roller started
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2) is not unblocked even after the
JAM at Duplex pre- rotating to re-feed paper.
lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
registration section
Detection of paper Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1DU) or Duplex Unit Transport
left in Duplex Sensor 2 (PC2DU) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a Action
Transport Section cover is opened and closed, or a JAM or malfunction is reset.
Table 3-15. Action
Action Relevant Electrical Parts
Table 3-13. Action Registration Roller Sensor (PC1)
Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Relevant Electrical Parts Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M1 DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2 DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2 DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Connection Diagram
Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M1 DU) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Control Signal
Connection Diagram (electrical parts)
Step Action 1 Initial check items --- ---
Location
Control Signal
(electrical parts) 2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check --- U-18
1 Initial check items --- --- 3 M1 operation check PWB-A DU PJ4A DU-1 to 4 V-19
2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check --- U-18 4 M2 operation check PWB-A DU PJ5A DU-1 to 4 V-19
3 PC2 I/O check, Sensor check --- U-18 5 Change PWB-A (p.312) --- ---
4 M1 operation check PWB-A DU PJ4A DU-1 to 4 V-19 6 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
5 M2 operation check PWB-A DU PJ5A DU-1 to 4 V-19
6 Change PWB-A (p.312) --- ---
7 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
3.3 Service Call Error
3.3.1 Error code

The CPU performs a self-diagnostics function. If a malfunction is detected, an error code is displayed on the Control Panel.
ERROR CODE LIST
Engine-related Error
Table 3-16. Error Code List

Code Item Detection Timing Reference
E100 Polygon Motor/C failure to turn
E101 Polygon Motor/M failure to turn The Polygon motor fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the
Polygon motor. p.113
E102 Polygon Motor/Y failure to turn Motor Lock signal detects H for a given period time consecutively during the Polygon motor is rotating.
E103 Polygon Motor/K failure to turn
E110 Laser malfunction (Cyan)
E111 Laser malfunction (Magenta) SOS signal is not detected within the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output.
p.113
E112 Laser malfunction (Yellow) SOS signal is not detected within a given period of time during printing or IDC sensor adjustment.
E113 Laser malfunction (Black)

The 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor doesn't turn ON (Retracting) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch has turned ON during
the Transfer Belt is retracting.
E200 Transfer Belt Separation p.114
The 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor doesn't turn OFF (Pressuring) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch has turned ON during
the Transfer Belt is pressuring.
The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor doesn't turn ON (Retracting) even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started rotating during the
2nd Transfer Roller is retracting.
E210 2nd Transfer Roller Separation p.114
The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor doesn't turn OFF (Pressuring) even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started rotating during the
2nd Transfer Roller is pressuring.
E220 Transfer Belt Unit New Article Release A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer Belt Unit is installed. p.114
Troubleshooting Service Call Error 107

Confidential

The temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second
or more uninterruptedly during Ready mode, Low Power mode or printing.
E300 Abnormally low Heating Roller temperature
The temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second
or more uninterruptedly during Ready mode, Low Power mode or printing.
The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor /1 (TH2) is lower than a given level of degree for
E301 Abnormally low Fusing Pressure Roller temperature
1 second or more uninterruptedly during Ready mode, Low Power mode or printing.
The temperatures of the Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) and the Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) are
E302 Abnormally high Heating Roller temperature higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly.
The Heater Relay is OFF.
The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for
1 second or more uninterruptedly before the Heater temperature control starts.
E303 Abnormally high Fusing Pressure Roller temperature
The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for
1 second or more uninterruptedly after the Heater temperature control starts. p.115
The Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) and the Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) fails to raise a given
degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Heating Roller Heater lamp/1
(H1) is turned ON.
E304 Heating Roller warm-up failure The detected temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower for a given level of degree than
one of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) after the Front Cover is opened or closed, the Main
Power Switch is turned ON, or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
The counter value of zero cross signal input is not updated for a given period of time.
The Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the Fusing Pressure Heater Lamp (H3) is turned ON.
E305 Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure The detected temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) is lower for a given level of
degree than one of the Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) after the Front Cover is opened or closed, the
Main Power Switch is turned ON, or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
E310 Fusing Unit New Article Release A new installation is not detected when a new Fusing Unit is installed. p.115
E400 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is lower than the specified value. p.116
E401 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is higher than the specified value. p.116
Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is lower than the specified value.
E402 p.116
Sensor
Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is higher than the specified value.
E403 p.116
Sensor
E404 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is lower than the specified value. p.116
E405 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is higher than the specified value. p.116

Confidential

E406 Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is lower than the specified value. p.117
E407 Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Mixture ratio of the toner and carrier in the developing machine is higher than the specified value. p.117
The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is
E500 Main Motor's failure to turn p.118
turning.
The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains
E501 Main Motor turning at abnormal timing p.118
stationary.
E510 Color PC Drum Motor's failure to turn p.118
turning.
E511 Color PC Drum Motor's turning at abnormal timing p.119
stationary.
E520 Color Developing Motor's failure to turn p.119
turning.
E521 Color Developing Motor's turning at abnormal timing p.120
stationary.
The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains
E550 Suction Fan Motor's failure to turn p.120
stationary.
E551 Cooling Fan Motor/1's failure to turn p.120
stationary.
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1's The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains
E552 p.120
failure to turn stationary.
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2's The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains
E553 p.121
failure to turn stationary.
E554 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's failure to turn p.121
stationary.
E555 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1's failure to turn p.121
stationary.
E556 Cooling Fan Motor 2's failure to turn p.121
stationary.
E600 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure
E601 Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure p.122
TCR Sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.
E602 Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure
E603 Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure p.122
E610 1st Image Transfer ATVC (color) failure An abnormal average value is detected while performing the first image transfer ATVC of color. p.123

Confidential

E611 1st Image Transfer ATVC (K) failure An abnormal average value is detected while performing the first image transfer ATVC of black. p.123
E612 2nd Image Transfer ATVC failure An abnormal average value is detected while performing the second image transfer ATVC. p.123
The output from the Color PC Drive Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of
E620 Color PC Drum sensor malfunction p.124
1,000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0).
The output from the Black PC Drive Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of
E621 BLACK PC Drum sensor malfunction p.124
1,000 ms while the Main Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0).
All outputs of Sensor photo-receiver section from the detection point (unprinted surface on the Image
Transfer Belt) are 0.5 V or less, or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC Sensor adjustment.
E630 IDC Sensor (front) failure p.125
Transfer Belt) are 1.9 V or less, or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC Sensor adjustment.
The output of Sensor photo-receiver section from the detection point (toner pattern on the Image Transfer
Belt) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.
Transfer Belt) are 0.5 V or less, or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC Sensor adjustment.
E631 IDC Sensor (back) failure p.125
Transfer Belt) are 1.9 V or less, or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC Sensor adjustment.
The output of Sensor photo-receiver section from the detection point (toner pattern on the Image Transfer
Belt) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.
The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during
main scan direction registration correction.
E640 Color Shift Test Pattern failure p.126
The number of points detected in the sub scan direction is more or less than the specified value during sub
scan direction registration correction.
The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction.
E641 Color Shift Adjust failure The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction. p.126
The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value.
The Bypass Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even when the Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given
number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the standby position to the feed
position was started.
E701 MP tray Rise Descent Error p.127
The Bypass Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given
number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the feed position to the standby
position was started.

Confidential

The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been
E702 Standard cassette Elevator failure
started.
E703 Optional Cassette1 Elevator failure p.127
started.
E704 Optional Cassette2 Elevator failure
started.
E900 Flash ROM write error Flash ROM writing is found faulty during a check. p.128
E901 RTC failure The correct access to the RTC Board is failed during access. p.128
E998 Engine communication error The correct access between the Controller Board and the Mechanical Control Board are failed during access. p.128

Confidential
Controller Related Error

C H E C K Sort code C is displayed as D depending on the module
P O IN T that detects errors on the hardware. In this case, read D as Sort Error Code Description Reference
C and execute the troubleshooting procedure. C 1400 Engine initialization error
C 1500 CCNV hardware error
C 1550 Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
Table 3-17. Error Code List C 1600 Video series hardware error
Sort Error Code Description Reference C 1610 Video series hardware error
Controller
C 0000-0799 CPU error C 1700 Loopback test of network board Related Error
C 0800 IPL error (controller defect) (p129)
C 1702 Network board uninstalled
C 0998 Engine communication error (only when power-on) C 1710 Token Ring hard ware error
C 0999 Engine flash ROM has no program data C 1800 SPD of DIMM error
C 1000 Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.) C 1999 Other hardware errors
C 1001 Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, etc.) C 2000 Software error
C 1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.)
C 1003 Optional RAM error
C 1010 Verification error
C 1021 RAM error (slot 1)
Controller
C 1100 ROM checksum error (font) Related Error
(p129)
C 1101 ROM checksum error (font)
C 1120 ROM checksum error (program)
C 1200 EEPROM writing error
C 1210 EEPROM writing times limit
C 1300 RTC error

Confidential
3.3.2 Solution to Engine-Related Error

E100: POLYGON MOTOR/C FAILURE TO TURN E110: LASER MALFUNCTION (CYAN)
E101: POLYGON MOTOR/M FAILURE TO TURN E111: LASER MALFUNCTION (MAGENTA)
E102: POLYGON MOTOR/Y FAILURE TO TURN E112: LASER MALFUNCTION (YELLOW)
E103: POLYGON MOTOR/K FAILURE TO TURN E113: LASER MALFUNCTION (BLACK)
PH Unit PH Unit
PH Interface Board (PWB-D) PH Interface Board (PWB-D)

Step Action Step Action Location
Location Control Signal
Control Signal (electrical parts)
(electrical parts)
1 Check the connector for proper --- --- 1 Check the connector for proper --- ---
connection and correct as necessary. connection and correct as necessary.
2 Change PH Unit (p.175) --- --- 2 Change PH Unit (p.175) --- ---
3 Change PWB-D (p.175) --- --- 3 Change PWB-D (p.175) --- ---

Confidential
E200: TRANSFER BELT SEPARATION E210: 2ND TRANSFER ROLLER SEPARATION

1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Right Door
Position Sensor (PC6) Main Motor (M1)
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Connection Diagram
Clutch (CL3) Step Action Location
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
Connection Diagram
1 Check the connector of motor for --- ---
Control Signal proper connection and correct as
(electrical parts) necessary.
1 Check the M1 connector for proper --- --- 2 Change Right Door (p.260) --- ---
connection and correct as necessary.
3 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
2 PC6 I/O check, Sensor check --- ---
3 CL3 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-11 (ON) K to L-2
4 M1 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM) K to L-2
PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK) E220: TRANSFER BELT UNIT NEW ARTICLE RELEASE
5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- --- Relevant Electrical Parts
Connection Diagram
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
1 Reinstall the Unit. --- ---
2 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E300: ABNORMALLY LOW HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE E310: FUSING UNIT NEW ARTICLE RELEASE
E301: ABNORMALLY LOW FUSING PRESSURE ROLLER Relevant Electrical Parts
TEMPERATURE
Fusing Unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
E302: ABNORMALLY HIGH HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE
Connection Diagram
E303: ABNORMALLY HIGH FUSING PRESSURE ROLLER
TEMPERATURE Step Action Location
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
E304: HEATING ROLLER WARM-UP FAILURE
1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct --- ---
E305: FUSING PRESSURE ROLLER WARM-UP FAILURE installation (whether it is secured in
position).
2 Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-M for --- ---
Fusing Unit proper connection and correct or
DC Power Supply (PU1) change as necessary.
3 Reinstall Fusing Unit --- ---
Connection Diagram
4 Change Fusing Unit --- ---
Control Signal 5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
(electrical parts)
1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct --- ---
installation (whether it is secured in
position).
2 Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-M and --- ---
PU1 for proper connection and correct
or change as necessary.
3 Change Fusing Unit --- ---
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
5 Change PU1 (p.193) --- ---

Confidential
E400: ABNORMALLY LOW TONER DENSITY DETECTED CYAN E401: ABNORMALLY HIGH TONER DENSITY DETECTED CYAN
TCR SENSOR TCR SENSOR
E402: ABNORMALLY LOW TONER DENSITY DETECTED E403: ABNORMALLY HIGH TONER DENSITY DETECTED
MAGENTA TCR SENSOR MAGENTA TCR SENSOR
E404: ABNORMALLY LOW TONER DENSITY DETECTED E405: ABNORMALLY HIGH TONER DENSITY DETECTED
YELLOW TCR SENSOR YELLOW TCR SENSOR
Photoconductor Unit/C Photoconductor Unit/C
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Photoconductor Unit/M Photoconductor Unit/M
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Controller Board (PWB-P)
Photoconductor Unit/Y Photoconductor Unit/Y
Controller Board (PWB-P)
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram Step Action Location
Step Action Control Signal
Location (electrical parts)
Control Signal
(electrical parts) 1 Clean the TCR Sensor window on the --- ---
1 Perform image --- --- underside of the Photoconductor Unit if
troubleshooting procedure if dirty.
image density is low. 2 Reinstall Photoconductor Unit. --- ---
2 Clean the TCR Sensor --- --- 3 Change Photoconductor Unit. --- ---
window on the underside of
the Photoconductor Unit if 4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
dirty. 5 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---
3 M6, M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13(M6) C-22
PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13(M7) C-23
4 Reinstall Photoconductor --- ---
Unit.
5 Change Photoconductor Unit. --- ---
6 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
7 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E406: ABNORMALLY LOW TONER DENSITY DETECTED BLACK TCR E407: ABNORMALLY HIGH TONER DENSITY DETECTED BLACK TCR
SENSOR SENSOR

Photoconductor Unit /K Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Photoconductor Unit /K
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) Controller Board (PWB-P) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)

1 Perform image troubleshooting --- --- 1 Clean the TCR Sensor window on the --- ---
procedure if image density is low. underside of the Photoconductor Unit
2 Clean the TCR Sensor window on the --- --- if dirty.
underside of the Photoconductor Unit 2 Reinstall Photoconductor Unit --- ---
if dirty. 3 Change Photoconductor Unit /K --- ---
3 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23 4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
4 Reinstall Photoconductor Unit --- --- 5 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---
5 Change Photoconductor Unit /K --- ---
6 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
7 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E500: MAIN MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN E501: MAIN MOTOR TURNING AT ABNORMAL TIMING

Main Motor (M1) Main Motor (M1)
DC Power Supply (PU1) DC Power Supply (PU1)

1 Check the M1 connector for proper --- --- 1 M1 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM) K to L-2
connection and correct as necessary. PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
2 Check M1 for proper drive coupling --- --- 2 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
and correct as necessary.
3 Change PU1 (p.193) --- ---
3 Check the PWB-M connector for --- ---
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
4 M1 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM) K L-2 E510: COLOR PC DRUM MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN
PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
6 Change PU1 (p.193) --- ---
Connection Diagram
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
necessary.
proper drive coupling and correct as
necessary.
necessary.
4 M2 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM) C-23
5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E511: COLOR PC DRUM MOTOR'S TURNING AT ABNORMAL TIMING E520: COLOR DEVELOPING MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN

Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Color Developing Motor (M3)
DC Power Supply (PU1)
Connection Diagram
Step Action Location Connection Diagram
Control Signal Step Action
(electrical parts) Location
Control Signal
1 M2 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM) C-23 (electrical parts)
PWB-M CNDM3-8 (LOCK) 1 Check the connector of motor for --- ---
2 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
necessary.
necessary.
3 Check the PU1 connector for proper --- ---
connection and correct as necessary.
necessary.
5 M3 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-5 (REM) C-22
6 Change PU1 (p.193) --- ---
7 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E521: COLOR DEVELOPING MOTOR'S TURNING AT ABNORMAL E551: COOLING FAN MOTOR/1'S FAILURE TO TURN
TIMING
Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
DC Power Supply (PU1) Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram Control Signal
(electrical parts)
Control Signal 1 heck the connector of motor for --- ---
(electrical parts) proper connection and correct as
1 M3 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-5 (REM) C-22 necessary.
PWB-M CNDM2-8 (LOCK) 2 Check the fan for possible overload --- ---
2 Change PU1 --- --- and correct as necessary.
3 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- --- 3 M12 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-15 (REM) C-22
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
E550: SUCTION FAN MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN

E552: FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR /1'S FAILURE TO TURN
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Right Door
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M13) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
Control Signal Step Action Location
(electrical parts) Control Signal
(electrical parts)
proper connection and correct as 1 Check the connector of motor for --- ---
necessary. proper connection and correct as
necessary.
2 Change Right Door (p.260) --- ---
2 Check the fan for possible overload --- ---
3 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- --- and correct as necessary.
3 M13 operation check PWB-M CNLP-9 (ON) C-11
PWB-M CNLP-11 (LOCK)
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E553: FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR /2'S FAILURE TO TURN E555: POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2(M11) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)

1 Check the connector of motor for --- --- 1 Check the connector of motor for --- ---
proper connection and correct as proper connection and correct as
necessary. necessary.
2 Check the fan for possible overload --- --- 2 Check the fan for possible overload --- ---
and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary.
3 M11 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-14 (ON) K to L-1 3 M8 operation check PWB-M CNLV3-2 (ON) C-27
PWB-M CNDM1-17 (LOCK) PWB-M CNLV3-3 (LOCK)
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) 4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
E554: OZONE VENTILATION FAN MOTOR'S FAILURE TO TURN E556: COOLING FAN MOTOR 2'S FAILURE TO TURN

Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)

1 Check the connector of motor for --- --- 1 Check the connector of motor for --- ---
2 Check the fan for possible overload --- --- 2 Check the fan for possible overload --- ---
3 M14 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-14 (ON) K to L-1 3 M22 operation check --- ---
PWB-M CNDM1-17 (LOCK) 4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
4 Change PWB-M (p.198)

Confidential
E600: CYAN TCR SENSOR ADJUSTMENT FAILURE E603: BLACK TCR SENSOR ADJUSTMENT FAILURE
E601: MAGENTA TCR SENSOR ADJUSTMENT FAILURE Relevant Electrical Parts
E602: YELLOW TCR SENSOR ADJUSTMENT FAILURE Photoconductor Unit /K Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) Controller Board (PWB-P)
Photoconductor Unit /C Connection Diagram
Photoconductor Unit /M Step Action Location
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Control Signal
Photoconductor Unit /Y (electrical parts)
1 Clean or correct each contact of the --- ---
Photoconductor Unit if faulty.
Connection Diagram
2 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23
Control Signal 3 Reinstall Photoconductor Unit /K --- ---
(electrical parts)
4 Change Photoconductor Unit /K --- ---
1 Clean the TCR Sensor window --- ---
on the underside of the 5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
Photoconductor Unit if dirty 6 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---
2 M6, M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6) C-22
PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7) C-23
3 Reinstall Photoconductor Unit --- ---
4 Change Photoconductor Unit --- ---
5 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
6 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
E610: 1ST IMAGE TRANSFER ATVC (COLOR) FAILURE E612: 2ND IMAGE TRANSFER ATVC FAILURE

Transfer Belt Unit Transfer Belt Unit
High Voltage Unit High Voltage Unit
Transfer Roller 2nd Transfer Roller

1 Check if the Transfer Roller and --- --- 1 Check if the Transfer Roller and --- ---
Transfer Belt are dirty and correct as Transfer Belt are dirty and correct as
2 Change High Voltage Unit (p.230) --- --- 2 Check that the 2nd Transfer Roller is --- ---
3 Change Transfer Belt Unit (p.162) --- --- properly installed and correct as
necessary.
3 Change 2nd Transfer Roller. (p.169) --- ---
4 Change High Voltage Unit. (p.230) --- ---
E611: 1ST IMAGE TRANSFER ATVC (K) FAILURE


Transfer Belt Unit High Voltage Unit
Connection Diagram
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
1 Check if the Transfer Roller and --- ---
Transfer Belt are dirty and correct as
necessary.
2 Change High Voltage Unit (p.230) --- ---
3 Change Transfer Belt Unit (p.162) --- ---

Confidential
E620: COLOR PC DRUM SENSOR MALFUNCTION E621: BLACK PC DRUM SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Transport Drive Assy Transport Drive Assy
Harness Harness

1 Check if the Detect Light Shield Plate --- --- 1 Check if the Detect Light Shield Plate --- ---
has damages and is properly installed, has damages and is properly installed,
2 Check the Transport Drive Assy --- --- 2 Check the Transport Drive Assy --- ---
connector for proper connection and connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary. correct as necessary.
3 Check the PWB-M connector for --- --- 3 Check the PWB-M connector for --- ---
4 Change the cable that connects --- --- 4 Change the cable that connects --- ---
Transport Drive Assy and PWB-M. Transport Drive Assy and PWB-M.
5 Change Transport Drive Assy (p.230) --- --- 5 Change Transport Drive Assy (p.230) --- ---

Confidential
E630: IDC SENSOR (FRONT) FAILURE E631: IDC SENSOR (BACK) FAILURE

IDC Sensor IDC Sensor

1 Check that the IDC Sensor is properly --- --- 1 Check that the IDC Sensor is properly --- ---
installed and correct as necessary. installed and correct as necessary.
2 Check if the IDC sensor is dirty and --- --- 2 Check if the IDC sensor is dirty and --- ---
correct as necessary. correct as necessary.
3 Check the IDC Sensor connector for --- --- 3 Check the IDC Sensor connector for --- ---
4 Check the PWB-M connector for --- --- 4 Check the PWB-M connector for --- ---
5 Change the cable that connects IDC --- --- 5 Change the cable that connects IDC --- ---
Sensor and PWB-M. Sensor and PWB-M.
6 Change the IDC Sensor. --- --- 6 Change the IDC Sensor. --- ---

Confidential
E640: COLOR SHIFT TEST PATTERN FAILURE E641: COLOR SHIFT ADJUST FAILURE

Transfer Belt Unit Photoconductor Unit PH Unit (displacement)
IDC Sensor PH Unit Transfer Belt Unit

1 Check if Transfer Belt has damages --- --- 1 Execute the correction of skew. --- ---
and correct as necessary. (p.315)
2 Check that the IDC Sensor is properly --- --- 2 Check if Transfer Belt has damages --- ---
installed and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary.
3 Check if the IDC sensor is dirty and --- ---
correct as necessary.
4 Check the IDC Sensor connector for --- ---
necessary.
necessary.
6 Change the cable that connects IDC
Sensor and PWB-M.
7 Change IDC Sensor. (p.210)
8 Change Photoconductor Unit. (p.162)
9 Change PH Unit. (p.175) --- ---

Confidential
E701: MP TRAY RISE DESCENT ERROR E702: STANDARD CASSETTE ELEVATOR FAILURE
Relevant Electrical Parts E703: OPTIONAL CASSETTE1 ELEVATOR FAILURE
MP tray Lift-up Sensor (PC14) E704: OPTIONAL CASSETTE2 ELEVATOR FAILURE
Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
Connection Diagram Lift-up Sensor (PC7-PC)
Step Action Location Lift-up Sensor (PC7-PC)
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
Connection Diagram
1 Check the M2-PC connector for --- ---
proper connection and correct as Step Action Location
Control Signal
necessary. (electrical parts)
2 Check the connector of M2-PC for --- --- 1 Check the M3-PC connector for --- ---
proper drive coupling and correct as proper connection and correct as
3 PC14 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNTRY1-10 (ON) C-10 2 Check the connector of M3-PC for --- ---
4 M2-PC operation check PWB-Z PJ5Z PC-5~8 Q-22 proper drive coupling and correct
as necessary.
5 Change PWB-Z-PC. (p.279) --- ---
3 PC7-PC I/O check, Sensor check PWB-Z PJ6Z PC-3 (ON) V-21 to 22
PWB-Z PJ4Z PC-4 to 5
4 M3-PC operation check Q-24
5 Change PWB-Z-PC. (p.279) --- ---

Confidential
E900: FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR E998: ENGINE COMMUNICATION ERROR

Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Controller Board (PWB-P) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)

1 Change PWB-M. (p.198) --- --- 1 Check the PWB-P connector for --- ---
2 Contact the service support section --- --- proper connection and correct as
counter since the error is beyond necessary.
restoration in the field. 2 Check the PWB-M connector for
necessary.
3 Change PWB-P (p.198) --- ---
E901: RTC FAILURE
4 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---
RTC Board (PWB-R) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Connection Diagram
Control Signal
(electrical parts)
1 Check the connector for proper --- ---
connection and correct as
necessary.
2 Change PWB-R (p.198) --- ---
3 Change PWB-M (p.198) --- ---

Confidential
3.3.3 Controller Related Error Check that the DIMM is connected to the controller board securely and
correctly.
When a controller related error occurs, make sure to check the initial check items listed
below first. If the error still occurs after that, replace the part given on an error basis in Check that the printer is not in electrically noisy environments.
the Failed Parts List to perform troubleshooting.
Initial Check When powering the printer off and on again, do not turn it
on immediately after turning it off. Make sure to wait at
Power the printer off and on several times.
least for a few seconds before the power-on.
Check that the printer is grounded properly.
Check that the connectors are connected to the controller board
securely and correctly.
Table 3-18. Failed Parts List
Error-causing hard ware (or factor)
Sort Error Code Description Mechanical

Controller Std. RAM Opt. RAM Video I/F
Code DIMM Control Noise, etc.
Board DIMM DIMM Cable
Board
C 0000-0799 CPU error
C 0800 IPL error (controller defect)
C 0998 Engine communication error (only when power-on)
C 0999 Flash ROM has no program data
C 1000 Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.)
C 1001 Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, etc.)
C 1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.)
C 1003 Optional RAM error
C 1010 Verification error

Confidential
Table 3-18. Failed Parts List

Error-causing hard ware (or factor)
Sort Error Code Description Mechanical

Controller Std. RAM Opt. RAM Video I/F
Code DIMM Control Noise, etc.
Board DIMM DIMM Cable
Board
C 1200 EEPROM writing error
C 1210 EEPROM writing times limit
C 1300 RTC error
C 1400 Engine initialization error
C 1500 CCNV hardware error
C 1550 Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
C 1600 Video series hardware error
C 1610 Video series hardware error
C 1700 Loopback test of network board
C 1702 Network board uninstalled
C 1710 Token Ring hard ware error
C 1800 SPD of DIMM error
C 1999 Other hardware errors
C 2000 Software error

Confidential
3.3.4 Other Errors

Details for troubleshooting on error message Photocon Trouble uuuu.
Cause
Adhesion toner on transfer belt is outside a proper range while image stabilizing control
Abnormal access between Photoconductor unit IC chip and Printer
Error-causing Part
High voltage contact point between Photoconductor unit and High Voltage Unit
Photoconductor unit
PH unit
Transfer belt unit
Waste toner pipe
Waste toner box
High voltage unit
Mechanical Control Board
Troubleshooting
Table 3-19. Troubleshooting

Step Remedy and Check Point Yes No
Check the connection status of cable and connector.
1 Photoconductor unit - High voltage unit Correct connection Go to Step2
Photoconductor unit - Mechanical Control Board - Controller Board

Confidential

Check the connection status and stain on high voltage point between Photoconductor unit and High voltage unit.
Figure 3-1. High voltage point on Photoconductor unit
Correct connection
status
2 Go to Step 3
Figure 3-2. High voltage point on High voltage unit Clean high voltage
point
Reset Photoconductor unit.
3 Check the installation status of PH unit. Correct installation Go to Step 4

Exchange
4 Check the operation of Photoconductor unit. Go to Step 5
Photoconductor unit

Confidential

1. "Photocon Trouble uuuu" - single color appear
Exchange abnormal color PH unit for normal color PH unit. If it is caused by PH unit, Exchange PH unit.
2. "Photocon Trouble uuuu" - several color appear
1. Exchange Transfer belt unit
2. Check the inside of a waste toner pipe. If the toner pipe is blocked by waste toner, break blocked toner into fragments. And clean toner
pipe inside.
3. When waste toner is much in waste toner box, inform user to exchange waste toner box.
<Supplementary explanation>
When the waste toner is blocked in the cleaner of Transfer belt unit and the
waste toner pipe, it is not possible to exhaust it normally. The pattern for the
image stabilization control can't be normally drawn on the transfer belt. As a
result, "Photocon Trouble uuuu" is appeared. One case with waste toner
blocking. Though the message of the exchange of waste toner box was
displayed, user kept using waste toner box with shaking. As the result, the
waste toner was not able to be exhausted normally.
5 See left column Go to Step 6
Figure 3-3. Waste toner blocked in the cleaner of

Transfer belt
Fixed screw
Figure 3-4. Waste toner pipe position Figure 3-4. Blocked waste toner in Waste toner pipe
Exchange the following parts when not repairing to step 5.

6 1. High voltage unit Exchange board End
2. Mechanical Control Board

Confidential
3.4 Power supply trouble
3.4.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation 3.4.2 Control panel indicators do not light
check) Relevant Electrical Parts
Relevant Electrical Parts Controller Board (PWB-P)

Control Panel (PWB-OP)
Lift-up Motor (M3-PC)
Location
Step Check Item (electrical Result Action
Location parts)
parts) Check the WIRING
Is a power voltage being applied
1 S to T-2 NO from the wall outlet to
Check the WIRING across CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1?
Is a power voltage supplied across S1 to CN1PU1.
1 S to T-2 NO from the wall outlet to
CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? 2 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting? --- NO Change PU1. (p.193)
S1 CN1PU1.
2 Are the fuses on PU1 conducting? --- NO Change PU1. (p.193) Is DC3.3 V being output from
3 R-4 NO Change PU1. (p.193)
CN6PU1-1 on PU1?
Is DC3.3 V being output from
3 R-4 NO Change PU1. (p.193) Check the WIRING
CN6PU1-1 on PU1? Is "Low" being output from
4 R-5 NO from the PWB-P to
Check the WIRING CN7PU1-2 on PU1?
Is "Low" being output from PWB-M to CN7PU1.
4 R-5 NO from the PWB-P to
CN7PU1-2 on PU1? Is DC5 V being output from
PWB-M to CN7PU1. 5 R-4 NO Change PU1. (p.193)
CN6PU1-2 on PU1?
Is DC24 V being output from
5 R-6 NO Change PU1. (p.193) Reconnect.
CN5PU1-2 on PU1?
Is J22P on PWB-P securely Check the WIRING
Is DC5 V being input to CN5PU1-3 6 T-10 NO
6 R-4 NO Change PU1. (p.193) connected? from the PWB-P to
on PU1?
PWB-M.
Is DC5 V being input to CNPOW-2 NO Change PU1. (p.193)
NO Reconnect.
7 on the Control Board? (LED on I-6 Change PWB-M.
YES Is CN1 on PWB-OP securely Change PWB-OP.
PWB-M does not blink.) (p.198) 7 V to W-10
connected? YES (p.193)
Change PWB-P. (p.198)
Troubleshooting Power supply trouble 134

Confidential
3.4.3 Fusing Heaters do not operate 3.4.4 Power is not supplied to option
Optional Paper Cabinet Unit
Primary Interlock Switch (S2) Location
Fusing Unit Step Check Item (electrical Result Action
parts)
Location Is DC24 V being applied to hookup Malfunction in Feeder
Step Check Item (electrical Result Action 1 O-21 NO
connector CN44-2? Unit
parts)
Check wiring from
Is the power source voltage applied Is DC24 V being output from
2 I-21 NO PWB-M to CN44 to
Check wiring from CNCST-2 on PWB-M?
across CN2PU1-1 to 2 on PU1? Feeder Unit.
1 S to T-2 NO power outlet to S1 to
During this time, the Right Door YES Change PU1. (p.193)
CN1PU1.
should be closed. Is DC24 V being output from
3 --- Malfunction in Feeder
Is the power source voltage applied YES Fusing Unit CN5PU1-2 on PU1? NO
Unit
2 across CN30-1 and 3, or across 2 U-6
and 3? NO Change PU1. (p.193) Duplex Unit
Location
parts)
Is DC24 V being output from Malfunction in Duplex
1 O-19 NO
CN19-2 on Duplex? Unit
Check wiring from
2 I-19 NO PWB-M to CN19 to
CNCOP-2 on PWB-M?
Duplex Unit.
YES Change PU1. (p.193)
3 --- Malfunction in Duplex
CNCOP-3 on PWB-M? NO
Unit
Troubleshooting Power supply trouble 135

Confidential
3.5 Image quality problem 3.5.2 Image Trouble List

When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the Initial Check Items and, if Table 3-20. Image Trouble List
the cause is yet to be identified, go to troubleshootings per image trouble. Sample Symptom Reference
3.5.1 Initial Check Items

Print a color image and determine whether the image problem occurs in monocolor or <Monocolor>
4-color. white lines in sub scan direction
4036fs4021c0 4036fs4023c0
white bands in sub scan direction p.139
colored lines in sub scan direction
colored bands in sub scan direction
4 Colors
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4024c0
Mono Color
<Monocolor>
white lines in main scan direction
4036fs4025c0 4036fs4027c0
white bands in main scan direction p.139
colored lines in main scan direction
colored bands in main scan direction
4039F4C505DA
4036fs4026c0 4036fs4028c0
Figure 3-5. Initial Check Items
<Monocolor>
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4045c0
p.140
uneven density in sub scan direction
4036fs4044c0
Troubleshooting Image quality problem 136

Confidential
Table 3-20. Image Trouble List Table 3-20. Image Trouble List
Sample Symptom Reference Sample Symptom Reference
<Monocolor> <Monocolor>
p.140 p.144
uneven density in main scan direction blank print, black print
4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0
ABCDE
ABCDE <Monocolor> <Monocolor>
ABCDE p.141 p.145
ABCDE low image density (decrease of ID) uneven image
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0 4138fs4507c0
<Monocolor>
p.142
gradation reproduction failure <4-Color>
white lines in sub scan direction
4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4023c0
white bands in sub scan direction p.146
ABCD colored lines in sub scan direction
ABCD colored bands in sub scan direction
<Monocolor >
ABCD p.142
foggy background
ABCD
ABCD 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4024c0
4036fs4030c0
<Monocolor>
p.143 <4-Color>
void areas, white spots
white lines in main scan direction
4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0
4036fs4025c0 4036fs4027c0
white bands in main scan direction p.147
colored lines in main scan direction
colored bands in main scan direction
<Monocolor>
AA colored spots
p.143
4036fs4026c0 4036fs4028c0
4036fs4052c0
<4-Color>
p.148
<Monocolor> uneven density in sub scan direction
p.144
blurred image
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0
4036fs4031c0

Confidential
Table 3-20. Image Trouble List Table 3-20. Image Trouble List
Sample Symptom Reference Sample Symptom Reference
<4-Color> <4-Color >

p.148 p.154
uneven density in main scan direction brush effect, blurred image
4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
<4-Color >
low image density (decrease of ID)
p.149 AA <4-Color>
back marking
p.154
ABCDE
4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0
4036fs4036c0
<4-Color > <4-Color>

p.150 p.155
poor color reproduction uneven image
4036fs4058c0 4138fs4507c0
<Monocolor> or <4-Color>
--- p.155
image troubles that appear at regular intervals
<4-Color>
AA incorrect color image registration
p.151
4036fs4032c0
<4-Color>
p.152
void areas, white spots
4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0
<4-Color>
AA colored spots
p.153
4036fs4052c0
CF
<4-Color>
CF poor fusing performance, offset
p.153
CF
4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0

Confidential
3.5.3 Solution <MONOCOLOR>

WHITE LINES IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION, WHITE BANDS IN MAIN
<MONOCOLOR> SCAN DIRECTION, COLORED LINES IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION,
WHITE LINES IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION, WHITE BANDS IN SUB SCAN COLORED BANDS IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION
DIRECTION, COLORED LINES COLORED BANDS IN SUB SCAN
DIRECTION A. Typical Faulty Images
A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main White bands in Main Colored lines in Main Colored bands in
Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Main Scan
Direction
White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in
Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Sub Scan Direction
4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0

4036fs4021c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action
Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Photoconductor The surface of the PC YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
Unit Drum is scratched.
1 Photoconductor The surface of the PC YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
Unit Drum is scratched. 2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean. 3 Contact terminals make NO Clean contact terminals.
good connection between
3 Contact terminals make NO Clean contact terminals. each PU and machine.
good connection between
each PU and machine. 4 Developing bias contact NO Clean contact terminal and
terminal makes good check terminal position.
4 Developing bias contact NO Clean contact terminal and connection.
terminal makes good check terminal position.
connection. 5 PH Unit The surface of the PH YES Clean with cleaning jig.
Window is dirty.
5 PH Unit The surface of the PH YES Clean with cleaning jig.
Window is dirty. 6 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit.
eliminated through the Change Transfer Belt.
6 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit. checks of steps up to 5. (p.162)
eliminated through the Change Transfer Belt. Change PH Unit. (p.175)
checks of steps up to 5. (p.162)
Change PH Unit. (p.175)

Confidential
<MONOCOLOR> <MONOCOLOR>
UNEVEN DENSITY IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION UNEVEN DENSITY IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION
A. Typical Faulty Images A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step Section Check Item Result Action Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 High image Uneven density in Sub Scan YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of 1 Photoconductor The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
density original Direction occurs at a pitch of paper with no originals placed, Unit scratched.
40 mm to 50 mm when a as the PU fails to keep up with 2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
multi-print cycle is run using a high demand for toner.
an original with high image
Window is dirty.
density (50% or more).
4 Transfer Belt Transfer Belt makes positive NO Check and correct contacts.
2 Photoconductor The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
Unit contact with plates on rails.
Unit scratched. (p.162)
5 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
(p.162)
4 Developing bias contact YES Clean.
6 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit.
terminal makes good
connection.
eliminated through the checks Change PH Unit. (p.175)
of steps up to 5. Change High Voltage Unit
5 PH Unit The surface of the PH NO Change PH Unit. (p.175)
(Image Transfer,
Window is dirty.
Neutralizing). (p.230)
6 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit.
eliminated through the checks Change PH Unit. (p.175)
of steps up to 5. Change Controller Board.
(p.198)
Change High Voltage Unit
(Image Transfer,

Confidential
<MONOCOLOR> Step Section Check Item Result Action

LOW IMAGE DENSITY (DECREASE OF ID) 10 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit.
A. Typical Faulty Images
eliminated through the checks Change Controller Board.
of steps up to 9. (p.198)
ABCDE
(Image Transfer,
ABCDE Neutralizing). (p.230)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
Step Section Check Item Result Action

1 Photoconductor Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
Unit
Window is dirty.
3 TCR Sensor The color TCR Sensor YES Clean.
window window on the LED Assy is
dirty.
4 Transfer Belt Transfer Belt makes positive NO Check and correct contacts.
Unit contact with plates on rails.
5 Cam gear operates properly NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
(p.162)
6 Hopper Unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.
7 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.
8 Replenish Execute the "Toner Admix" in NO Go to next step.
Toner the Maintenance Menu to
charge toner.
9 Adjust Density Change the setting value for NO Go to next step.
"Max Density" in the Printer
Adjust Menu.

Confidential
GRADATION REPRODUCTION FAILURE FOGGY BACKGROUND
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 ABCD
4036fs4030c0
1 Photoconductor Dirty on the outside. YES Clean. Step Section Check Item Result Action
Unit 1 Photoconductor Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
2 PH Unit The surface of the PH YES Clean with cleaning jig. Unit
Window is dirty. 2 PH Unit The surface of the PH YES Clean with cleaning jig.
3 TCR Sensor TCR Sensor window is dirty. YES Clean. Window is dirty.
window 3 TCR Sensor The color TCR Sensor YES Clean.
4 Adjust Density Change the setting value for NO Go to next step. window window is dirty.
"Max Density" in the Printer 4 Adjust Density Change the setting value for NO Go to next step.
Adjust Menu. "Max Density" in the Printer
5 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit. Adjust Menu.
eliminated through the checks Change Controller Board. 5 Blur Margin Change the setting value for NO Go to next step.
of steps up to 5. (p.198) "Blur Margin" in the Printer
Change PH Unit. (p.175) Adjust Menu.
Change High Voltage Unit 6 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit.
(Image Transfer, eliminated through the checks Change Controller Board.
Neutralizing). (p.230) of steps up to 5. (p.198)
(Image Transfer,

Confidential
VOID AREAS, WHITE SPOTS COLORED SPOTS

Void areas White spots Colored spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
4036fs4051c0
4036fs4050c0
1 Image Check There are void areas at the YES Refer to p.141. 1 Photoconductor Developing bias contact NO Clean contact terminal and
front side or high density Unit terminal makes good check terminal position.
section. connection.
2 There is void area at the rear YES Change the setting value of 2 The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
side section. "TR XXX" in the Printer scratched.
Adjust Menu. 3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
3 Photoconducto The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
r Unit scratched.
4 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
5 Toner Foreign matter or caked toner YES Remove foreign matter.
Cartridge in the Toner Cartridge.

Confidential
BLURRED IMAGE BLANK PRINT, BLACK PRINT

Blurred image Blank print Black print
4036fs4031c0 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0
1 PH Unit The surface of the PH YES Clean with cleaning jig. 1 Image Check A blank print occurs. YES Check PH Unit connector for
Window is dirty. proper connection.
2 Photoconductor Dirty on the outside. YES Clean. 2 Photoconductor Coupling of PU drive NO Check and correct drive
Unit Unit mechanism is installed transmitting coupling. Change
3 The problem has been NO Change Photoconductor Unit. properly. PU.
eliminated through the checks (p.162) 3 The PC Drum Charge Corona NO Check, clean, or correct the
of steps up to 2. Change PH Unit. (p.175) voltage contact or PC Drum contact.
ground contact of the
Photoconductor Unit is
connected properly.
4 High Voltage Connector is connected NO Reconnect.
Unit (Image properly.
Transfer,
Neutralizing)
5 The problem has been NO Change High Voltage Unit
eliminated through the check (Image Transfer,
of step 4. Neutralizing). (p.230)
Change Controller Board.
(p.198)

Confidential
<MONOCOLOR>
UNEVEN IMAGE
4138fs4507c0

1 Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every NO Re-install it.
color is surely installed.
2 PH Unit PH Unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it.
3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 YES Replace PH Unit Stopper.
mm pitch. (p.175)
4 Toner Cartridge There is any stain or breakage YES Clean/replace the Toner
on the Drive section of the Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge.
5 Photoconductor There is any stain, damage or YES Change Photoconductor Unit.
Unit abrasion on the PC drum. (p.162)
6 2nd Transfer There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the 2nd Transfer
Roller deformation or abrasion on the Roller. (p.169)
Transfer roller.
7 Fusing Unit There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the Fusing unit.
deformation or abrasion on the (p.162)
Roller and Drive section of the
Fusing Unit.
8 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
eliminated through the check (p.162)
of step 7.

Confidential
<4-COLOR> Step Section Check Item Result Action

WHITE LINES IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION, WHITE BANDS IN SUB SCAN 9 The problem has been NO Change Controller Board.
DIRECTION, COLORED LINES IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION, AND eliminated through the checks (p.198)
COLORED BANDS IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION
of steps up to 8.
White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in
Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Sub Scan Direction
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0

4036fs4021c0

1 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent.
Unit foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 "
the Transfer Belt MAINTENANCE (p. 331)")
2 Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.
scratched. Change Transfer Belt Unit that
has damages.
3 Cleaning Blade is not YES Clean Cleaning blade.
effective in removing toner Change Transfer Belt Unit.
completely. (p.162)
4 2nd Transfer 2nd Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Transfer Roller.
Roller scratched. (p.169)
5 Paper path There is foreign matter on YES Remove foreign matter.
paper path.
6 Image Transfer Paper Separator YES Clean or change.
Fingers are damaged or dirty.
7 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate YES Clean.
is dirty or damaged. Change Fusing Unit. (p.162)
8 Fusing Paper Separator YES Clean.
Fingers are dirty.

Confidential

WHITE LINES IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION, WHITE BANDS IN MAIN 7 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate YES Clean.
SCAN DIRECTION, COLORED LINES IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION, AND
is dirty or damaged. Change Fusing Unit. (p.162)
COLORED BANDS IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION
8 Fusing Paper Separator YES Clean.
A. Typical Faulty Images Fingers are dirty.
White lines in Main White bands in Colored lines in Main Colored bands in 9 Neutralizing The resistance values between NO Check the contact. Modify.
Scan Direction Main Scan Scan Direction Main Scan Brush the Neutralizing brush and the Change Neutralizing brush.
Direction Direction ground terminal is not .
10 The problem has been NO Change Controller Board.
eliminated through the checks (p.198)
of steps up to 9.
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0
4036fs4027c0
4036fs4028c0

1 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent
the Transfer Belt. MAINTENANCE (p. 331)")
2 Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft
scratched. cloth.
Change Transfer Belt if belt is
damaged.
3 Cleaning Blade is not YES Clean Cleaning Blade.
effective in removing toner Change Transfer Belt Unit.
completely. (p.162)
paper path.
6 Image Transfer Paper YES Clean or change.
Separator Fingers are
damaged or dirty.

Confidential
<4-COLOR> <4-COLOR>
UNEVEN DENSITY IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION UNEVEN DENSITY IN MAIN SCAN DIRECTION
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0
1 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent. 1 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent.
Unit foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 " Unit foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 "
the Transfer Belt. MAINTENANCE (p. 331)") the Transfer Belt. MAINTENANCE (p. 331)")
2 Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft 2 Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft
scratched. cloth. scratched. cloth.
Change Transfer Belt Unit that Change Transfer Belt Unit that
has damages. has damages.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean. 3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 2nd Transfer 2nd Transfer Roller is NO Reinstall. 4 2nd Transfer 2nd Transfer Roller is NO Reinstall.
Roller installed properly. Roller installed properly.
5 2nd Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Transfer Roller 5 2nd Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Transfer Roller.
scratched. Unit. (p.169) scratched. (p.169)
6 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit. 6 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
eliminated through the checks (p.162) eliminated through the checks (p.162)
of steps up to 5. of steps up to 5. Change High Voltage Unit
(Image Transfer,

Confidential

LOW IMAGE DENSITY (DECREASE OF ID) 8 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
A. Typical Faulty Images of steps up to 6. Change Controlzler Board.
(p.198)
ABCDE (Image Transfer,
ABCDE Neutralizing). (p.230)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0

1 Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just
unwrapped from its package.
Install Paper Dehumidifying
Heater.
2 Transfer Belt Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
Unit
3 2nd Transfer 2nd Transfer Roller is NO Reinstall.
Roller installed properly.
4 Charge Neutralizing Cloth is NO Correct or change.
not separated and ground
terminal is connected
properly.
5 IDC Sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
6 Replenish Execute the "Toner Admix" in NO Go to next step.
Toner the Maintenance Menu to
charge toner.
Adjust Menu.

Confidential

POOR COLOR REPRODUCTION 7 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
A. Typical Faulty Images of steps up to 6. Change Controller Board.
(p.198)
(Image Transfer,
4036fs4058c0

1 Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just
unwrapped from its package.
Install Paper Dehumidifying
Heater.
2 Transfer Belt Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
Unit
properly.
5 IDC Sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
Adjust Menu.

Confidential
<4-COLOR>
INCORRECT COLOR IMAGE REGISTRATION
AA
4036fs4032c0

1 Machine Vibration is given to the YES Turn off the Main Power
condition machine after main power Switch and turn it on again
switch has been turned ON. more than 10 seconds after.
foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 "
the Image Transfer Belt. MAINTENANCE (p. 331)")
scratched. cloth. Change Transfer Belt
Unit that has damages.
4 Drive coupling to the machine YES Clean.
is dirty.
7 2nd Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Transfer Roller.
scratched. (p.169)
of steps up to 9. Change Controller Board.
(p.198)

Confidential

VOID AREAS, WHITE SPOTS 9 The problem has been NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
A. Typical Faulty Images of steps up to 8.
Void area White spots
4036fs4051c0
4036fs4050c0

1 Image Check There are void areas at the front YES p.149
side or high density section.
2 There are void areas in the YES Change the setting value of "TR
trailing edge. XXX" in the Printer Adjust
Menu.
3 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent
5 2nd Transfer 2nd Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2md Transfer Roller.
properly.
7 Paper path There is foreign matter on Remove foreign matter.
paper path.
8 Pre-Image Transfer Guide Clean or change.
Plate is damaged or dirty.

Confidential
<4-COLOR> <4-COLOR>
COLORED SPOTS POOR FUSING PERFORMANCE, OFFSET
Poor fusing Offset

performance
AA CF
CF
CF
4036fs4052c0
4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0
Step Section Check Item Result Action B. Troubleshooting Procedure

1 Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
Unit foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 " 2 The problem has been NO Change Fusing Unit. (p.162)
the Transfer Belt. MAINTENANCE (p. 331)") eliminated through the check
of step up to 1.
paper path.
6 Fusing Unit Fusing Belt is dirty or YES Change Fusing Unit. (p.162)
scratched.
of steps up to 6.

Confidential
<4-COLOR> <4-COLOR>
BRUSH EFFECT, BLURRED IMAGE BACK MARKING

Brush effect Blurred image
AA
4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0 4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0
1 Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just 1 2nd Transfer Image 2nd Transfer Roller is YES Change 2nd Transfer Roller.
unwrapped from its package. Roller scratched or dirty. (p.169)
Install Paper Dehumidifying 2 Paper path There is foreign matter on YES Remove foreign matter.
Heater. paper path.
2 Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting. 3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate YES Clean or change.
3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate YES Clean. is scratched or dirty.
is dirty. 4 Lower Fusing Roller is YES Change Fusing Unit. (p.162)
4 Fusing Belt is dirty or YES Change Fusing Unit. (p.162) scratched or dirty.
scratched. 5 Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other YES Clean with specified solvent.
foreign matter is evident on (Refer to Chapter 6 "
of steps up to 5. Change High Voltage Unit
(Image Transfer,

Confidential
<4-COLOR> <MONOCOLOR> OR <4-COLOR>

UNEVEN IMAGE IMAGE TROUBLES THAT APPEAR AT REGULAR INTERVALS
When an image trouble occurred at the certain pitch, some rollers at the printing
A. Typical Faulty Images process or the paper conveying system in the engine have something wrong. Perform
efficient trouble shooting by checking the appropriate roller, based on circumferential
length (interval) for each roller listed in the following table.
Check as follows.
1. Check the pitch (interval) of image troubles
2. Refer to the following table to find out the appropriate roller.
3. Check if the roller has foreign matters or damages at the point that matches
with the image trouble point.
4138fs4507c0
Circumferential Length Roller Unit to be Replaced

B. Troubleshooting Procedure 94.20mm PC Drum Photoconductor Unit
Step Section Check Item Result Action 50.24mm Developing Roller
1 Toner The Toner Cartridge of every NO Re-install it. 62.61mm 2nd Transfer Roller 2nd Transfer Roller
Cartridge color is surely installed. 125.60mm Heating Roller Fusing Unit
2 PH Unit PH Unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it. 116.18mm Pressure Roller
3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 YES Replace PH Unit Stopper. (751 0.7mm) Transfer Belt Transfer Belt Unit
mm pitch. (p.175)
4 Toner There is any stain or breakage YES Clean/replace the Toner
Cartridge on the Drive section of the Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge.
5 Toner There is any stain, damage or YES Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Cartridge abrasion on the PC drum. (p.175)
6 2nd Transfer There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the 2nd Transfer
Roller deformation or abrasion on the Roller. (p.169)
2nd Transfer Roller.
7 Fusing Unit There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the Fusing unit.
deformation or abrasion on the (p.162)
Roller and Drive section of the
Fusing Unit.
8 The problem has been NO Replace the Transfer Belt.
of step 7.

Confidential
CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Confidential
4.1 Preliminary Check 4.1.2 Parts/Units that Should Not be Disassembled

Do not disassemble the following parts or units. Doing so can result in malfunction of
4.1.1 Tool List the printer.
The tools listed below are required for disassembling the printer. Consumables / After Service Parts
Do not disassemble the consumables or parts/units that are supplied as After

Tool Name Code Usage Reference
Service Parts.
For disassembling all of
Phillips screwdriver No.2 1080532 ---
the parts/units Example:
Long-nose pliers 1080564 Use as required --- Toner Cartridge
Tweezers 1080561 Use as required ---
Fusing Unit
PH Unit
Parts/Units that are not described in this manual
Do not disassemble any parts/units that are not described in this manual.
Especially, the main frame must be kept unchanged from its original state because
the frame position has been strictly adjusted at the factory. Never loosen or remove
the screws securing the frame.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Preliminary Check 157

Confidential
4.1.3 How to Read this Chapter

PAGE CONFIGURATION
Opening page Main page

Guide Part Name Final Procedure
Location Guide to indicate the Shows part to be The pink Guide indicates that the
Shows location of each procedural steps. disassembled or operation to step is the final step of the
part. be performed in the column. disassembly procedure.
EPSON AcuLaser M2000D/M2000DN/M2010D/M2010DN Revision A EPSON AcuLaser M2000D/M2000DN/M2010D/M2010DN Revision A
1.3.4 Group 4 - Bottom of Main Unit - A1 B1 A2 B2

Paper Cassette Paper Feed Roller (Paper Cassette)
CONTENT C1
Table 1-7.
Parts/Units to be Disassembled Guide
Paper Feed Roller (Paper Cassette)
A Feed Shaft
Paper Sensor
B
Separation Roller (Paper Cassette)
C
Paper Feed Roller
B Paper Sensor
A Paper Feed Roller (Paper Cassette)

Lever
C Separation Roller (Paper Cassette)
Paper Cassette Feed Shaft

Paper Feed Roller
Feed Shaft
1. Remove the Paper Cassette.
Shape of the Shaft Oval shape
1. Push the lever and remove the Paper Feed Roller.

Match the Feed Shaft end with the oval hole on the Paper Feed Roller.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Main Unit Disassembly/Reassembly 30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Main Unit Disassembly/Reassembly 32
Confidential Confidential
Part Name/Guide Procedure

Lists parts or units included in the Group. Describes disassembly procedure.
Each of their disassembly procedure is given Reassemble the parts or units by
with the alphabetic character shown in the reversing the disassembly procedure.
Guide column.

Confidential
PROCEDURE 3. Go to main pages, find the columns that has the Guide character on the
upper left corner, and perform the procedure described in the columns in
1. Find the part/unit you want to remove in the table. numerical sequence.
2. Check the alphabetic character Guide in the Guide column for the target
Example: To disassemble the Separation Roller, find columns with C
part/ unit.
on their upper left corner, and follow the procedures in the
Example: When you want to remove the Separation Roller, its Guide is columns in numerical order.
C.
EPSON AcuLaser M2000D/M2000DN/M2010D/M2010DN Revision A
1.3.4 Group 4 A1 B1
Paper Cassette
A2 B2
Paper Feed Roller (Paper Cassette)
C1
CONTENT
Feed Shaft
Table 1-7.
Parts/Units to be Disassembled Guide Paper Feed Roller
Paper Feed Roller (Paper Cassette) A EPSON AcuLaser M2000D/M2000DN/M2010D/M2010DN Revision A
Lever
B3
B
Paper Sensor Separation Roller (Paper Cassette)
Paper Sensor C2
Separation Roller (Paper Cassette) C Paper Cassette

Bottom Paper Feed Roller
Front Face
Feed Shaft
Hooks Feed Shaft

Separation Roller
Connector
1. Remove the Paper Cassette. Bottom Plate
Shape of the Shaft Oval shape

Actuator
1. Push the lever and remove the Paper Feed Roller.

Match the Feed Shaft end with the oval hole on the Paper Feed Roller.
Paper Sensor
Holder
Feed Shaft
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Main Unit Disassembly/Reassembly 32

Confidential
1. Put the printer upside down. 1. Secure the Bottom Plate by pressing it down.
2. Pull the Feed Shaft out in the direction of the arrow.
3. Disengage the two hooks and remove the holder.
4. Remove the actuator from the holder.
5. Disengage the hook and remove the Paper Sensor.
6. Disconnect the connector from the Paper Sensor.

Confidential

Confidential
4.2 List of Disassembly/Reassembly Parts/Units Table 4-1. Main Unit

Section Parts/Unit Ref.
Table 4-1. Main Unit Multi Bypass Unit P. 210
Section Parts/Unit Ref. PH Unit P. 175
Toner Cartridge (+ Odor Filter) P. 175 Transfer Drive Assy P. 230
Consumables Photoconductor Unit P. 162 Unit Hopper Drive Assy P. 246
Waste Toner Collector + Exhaust Filter P. 162 Fusing Drive Assy P. 230
Fusing Unit P. 162 Paper Width Detection Unit P. 206
Transfer Belt Unit P. 162 Near Empty Assy P. 260
2nd Transfer Roller P. 169 Color Developing Motor (M3) P. 226
Ozone Filter P. 169 Color PC Drum Motor (M2) P. 226
Dust Filter P. 169 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) P. 221
Periodic Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6) P. 221
Feed Roller (Standard Cassette) P. 169
replacement parts Maintenance Unit Main Motor (M1) P. 226
Feed Roller (MP tray) P. 210
Separation Roller (Standard Cassette) P. 169 Fusing Drive Motor (M4) P. 221
Separation Roller (MP tray) P. 210 IDC Sensor/1 (SE1) + IDC Sensor/2 (SE2) P. 210
Feed Roller (Optional Cassette Unit) P. 291 Standard Cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) P. 246
Separation Roller (Optional Cassette Unit) P. 291 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor
P. 246
Motor (PC6)
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover P. 193
/Sensor 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) P. 230
Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover P. 221
/Clutch Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8)
MP tray Left Cover
+ MP tray Right Cover P. 210 Front Door Switch/2 (S4)
+ Tray Extension Front Door Switch/1 (S3)
P. 300
Exterior parts Front Door P. 162 Main Power Switch (S1)
Right Door P. 260 Primary Interlock Switch (S2)
Exit Tray P. 193 Right Door Switch (S5)
Upper Cover + Control Panel P. 193 Developing Clutch (CL4)
Standard Paper Cassette P. 206 MP tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC14)
P. 304
Front Cover P. 175 MP tray Registration Clutch Sensor (CL5)
Controller Board (PWB-P) P. 198 MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) P. 198 Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22)
RTC Board P. 198 Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12)
Board and etc. DC Power Supply (PU1) P. 193 Fan Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) P. 297
High Voltage Unit (HV1) P. 230 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8)
Standard Cassette Paper Size Board (PWB-I) P. 221 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11)
PH Interface Board (PWB-D) P. 175
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY List of Disassembly/Reassembly Parts/Units 160

Confidential
Table 4-2. Optional Cassette Unit

Parts/Unit Ref.
Optional Cassette P. 275
Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover P. 275
Right Rear Cover P. 275
Control Board (PWB-Z-PC) P. 279
Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC) P. 279
Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC) P. 279
Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC) P. 286
Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) P. 286
Vertical Transport Door P. 291
Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy P. 291
CD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC4-PC)
Set Sensor (PC2-PC)
Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC) P. 306
Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC)
Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC)
Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC)
Table 4-3. Duplex Unit

Parts/Unit Ref.
Duplex Unit P. 271
Duplex Unit Rear Cover P. 271
Switchback Motor (M1DU) P. 271
Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (PCIDU)
Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M2DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2DU) P. 310
Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1DU)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY List of Disassembly/Reassembly Parts/Units 161

Confidential
4.3 Main Unit Disassembly/Reassembly

E Exhaust Filter
Photoconductor Unit
4.3.1 Group 1 C
CONTENT
A Front Cover
Front Door A
Transfer Belt Unit B
Photoconductor Unit C
Fusing Unit D
Waste Toner Collector + Exhaust Filter E
E Waste Toner Collector
D Fusing Unit
B Transfer Belt Unit

Confidential
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 Front Door
(P. 164)
B1 Transfer Belt Unit

(P. 164)
C1 Photoconductor Unit
(P. 166)
D1 Fusing Unit
(P. 166)
E1 Waste Toner Collector

+ Exhaust Filter (P. 168)

Confidential
A1 B1
Front Door Transfer Belt Unit
[2]
[2]
[4] [1]
4039F2C005DA
[1] 4038F2C038DB
C H E C K The Transfer Belt Unit is included in "Transfer Kit" as a service part. Additionally, the
[3] P O IN T
2nd Image Transfer Roller, Ozone filter, and Dust Filter are also included in "Transfer
Kit". Replace them at the same time. Refer to (Refer to Chapter 6
MAINTENANCE) (p331))
After the Transfer Belt Unit has been removed from the Main Unit for other purposes
4038F2C039DA than replacement, make sure to put it in the shipping plastic sheet whose color is
black, or wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place.
1. Open the Front Door. 1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove the Screw [1] each to remove the Right and Left Stoppers [2]. 2. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Transfer Belt Unit [2].
3. Pull out the Right and Left Pins [3] to remove the Front Door [4].

Confidential
[3]
4039F2C006DA
[4]
[4]
Matched Not Matched
[5]
3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Transfer Belt Unit [3] a little. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit into the Main Unit completely and make sure the
4. Hold the position [4] as shown in the figure above and remove the Transfer Belt [5]. Drive Gear of the Transfer Belt Unit matches with that of the Main Unit. And then,
secure them with Screws. If they are secured even though both Drive Gears have
When installing the Transfer Belt Unit, be careful of the following points.
not been matched, the Main Unit may be damaged when closing the cover.
Insert the Transfer Belt with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by
hitting it against the rail or associated part.
Do not touch the surface of the Transfer Belt.

Confidential
C1
Photoconductor Unit Fusing Unit
D1
[1]
[2]
[3] 4039F2C010DA
Don't burn the Photoconductor Unit. Toner remnants may spatter and cause fire. And 4039F2C011DA
It may result in burns.
Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down.
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Push down the protrusion of the Photoconductor Unit to be replaced, and slowly pull it
toward. 1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then
wait for about 20 minutes.
3. Remove two Claws [1], and remove the Exit Tray Connector protective cover [2].
4. Disconnect the Connector [3].

Confidential
[4]
[8]
[5]
4039F2C012DA
[7] 4039F2C014DA
[6]
4039F2C013DA
5. Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Connector protective cover [5]. 7. Open the Right Door.
6. Disconnect two Connectors [6]. 8. Open the Fusing Unit Cover.
9. Remove two Screws [7], and remove the Fusing unit [8].

Confidential
Waste Toner Collector + Exhaust Filter

E1
Don't burn the used Waste Toner Collector. Toner may spatter and cause fire. And It 3. Remove the Exhaust Filter from the top face of the printer.
may result in burns.
C H E C K The Exhaust Filter is supplied with the Waste Toner Collector. Replace it when
P O IN T
replacing the Waste Toner Collector.

2. Push the unlocking knob in the printer side. And then, pull out the Waste Toner Collector
which popped up from the printer.

Confidential
4.3.2 Group 2 C Dust Filter
CONTENT
2nd Transfer Unit A

Ozone Filter B
Dust Filter C
Feed Roller (Standard Cassette) D
Separation Roller (Standard Cassette) E
B Ozone Filter
D Feed Roller
E Separation Roller
A 2nd Transfer Unit

Confidential
Start
A1 2nd Transfer Unit

(P. 171)
B1 Ozone Filter
(P. 171)
C1 Dust Filter
(P. 172)
D1 Feed Roller (Std. Cassette)

(P. 172)
E1 Separation Roller (Std. Cassette)

(P. 173)

Confidential
A1 B1
2nd Transfer Unit Ozone Filter
[2] [1]
[1]
C H E C K The 2nd transfer roller is included in the Transfer unit, and the 2nd transfer roller C H E C K The ozone filter is included in the Transfer unit, and the filter should be replaced with
P O IN T P O IN T
should be replaced with other parts in the Transfer unit at the same time. other parts in the Transfer unit at the same time.
1. Open the Right Door. 1. Holding onto the hook, remove the Ozon Filter [1].
2. Unlock the Lock levers [1] (at two palaces), remove the 2nd Transfer Roller [2].

Confidential
C1
Dust Filter Feed Roller (Standard Cassette)
D1
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
C H E C K The dust filter is included in the Transfer unit, and the filter should be replaced with C H E C K The separation roller should be replaced, whenever the feed roller is replaced.
P O IN T P O IN T
other parts in the Transfer unit at the same time.
IF the Duplex unit is mounted, remove it.
1. Slide out the standard paper cassette.
1. Remove the Dust Filter [1]. 2. Lock the paper lifting plate [1] into position.
3. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the feed roller assy [3].
4. Remove the shaft for the feed roller assy [3] from the front bushing.

Confidential
Separation Roller (Standard Cassette)

E1
[4]
[6] [2]
[5]
[1]
4038F2C002DB
5. Snap off the C-clip [4], one collar [5] and remove the Feed Roller [6]. C H E C K The pickup roller should be replaced, whenever the separation roller is replaced.
P O IN T
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
When installing the Feed Roller with a new one, make sure to reset the life counter.
(Refer to Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT) (p313))
1. Slide out the standard paper cassette.
2. Remove two Screws [1] and the Separation Roller ounting bracket assy [2].

Confidential
[4] [6]
[7]
[3]
[5]
4038F2C003DB
[9]
[8]
4037F2C509DA
3. Take off the rubber stopper [3], shaft [4], spring [5], and guide plate [6] to remove the
Separation Roller fixing bracket assy [7].
4. Snap off the E-ring [8] and the Separation Roller [9].

Confidential
4.3.3 Group 3
B Front Cover
CONTENT
Toner Cartridge (+ Odor Filter) A

Front Cover B
PH Interface Board (PWB-D) C
PH Unit D
A Toner Cartridge A Odor Filter
C PH Interface Board
(PWB-D)
D PH Unit

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 D1 Toner Cartridge (+ Odor Filter) C9 D9 Transfer Belt Unit

(P. 177) (P. 184)
B2 C2 D2 Photoconductor Unit C10 D10 PH Unit

PH Interface Board (PWB-D)
(P. 178) (P. 185) (P. 188)
B3 C3 D3 Waste Toner Collector

+ Exhaust Filter (P. 178)
B4 C4 D4 Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover

(P. 179)
B5 C5 D5 Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover

(P. 180)
B6 C6 D6 Exit Tray
(P. 180)
B7 C7 D7 Front Door
(P. 181)
B8 C8 D8 Front Cover
(P. 182)

Confidential
A1 B1
Toner Cartridge (+ Odor Filter)
C1 D1
Don't burn the Toner Cartridge. Toner may spatter and cause fire. And It may
result in burns.
Don't touch the inside printer which is not specified while replacing. It may result
in burns or cause degrading of print quality. C H E C K Replace the Odor Filter when replacing black (K) Toner Cartridge.
P O IN T

2. Push up the place indicated by arrow as shown in the figure above and slowly pull the Toner 3. Remove the Odor Filter from the left side of the printer.
Cartridge toward.
Place the pulled Toner Cartridge face down.

Confidential
B2 B3
Photoconductor Unit Waste Toner Collector + Exhaust Filter
C2 D2 C3 D3
Don't burn the Photoconductor Unit. Toner remnants may spatter and cause fire. And Don't burn the used Waste Toner Collector. Toner may spatter and cause fire. And It
It may result in burns. may result in burns.
1. Open the Front Door. C H E C K The Exhaust Filter is supplied with the Waste Toner Collector. Replace it when
P O IN T
2. Push down the protrusion of the Photoconductor Unit to be replaced, and slowly pull it replacing the Waste Toner Collector.
toward.
2. Push the unlocking knob in the printer side. And then, pull out the Waste Toner Collector
which popped up from the printer.

Confidential
B4
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover
C4 D4
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5] [1]
3. Remove the Exhaust Filter from the top face of the printer.
1. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Rear Left Cover [3].
2. Open the Front Door [1].
3. Remove two Screws [4], and remove the Front Left Cover [5].

Confidential
B5 B6
Rear Right Cover + Rear Cover Exit Tray
C5 D5 C6 D6
[4]
[5]
[3] [3]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [2]
4039F2C019DA
1. Open the Right Door [1]. 1. Open the Upper Fusing Cover [2].
2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Right Rear Cover [3]. 2. Remove two Claws [3], and remove the Upper Fusing Cover [2].
3. Remove nine Screws [4], and remove the Rear Cover [5].

Confidential
B7
[5] Front Door
C7 D7
[2]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[1] 4038F2C038DB
[7] [3]
3. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Exit Sensor Holder [6].
4038F2C039DA
4. Remove three Screws [7], and remove the Exit Tray [8].

2. Remove the Screw [1] each to remove the Right and Left Stoppers [2].

Confidential
B8
Front Cover
C8 D8
[1] [4]
[4]
[5]
[2]
4038F2C051DA
[3]
3. Release two Hooks [4] and remove the Guide [5] installed in the insertion slot of the Toner
4038F2C052DA Cartridge (K).
Don't use too much force when releasing the Hooks of the Guide because they break
1. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Connector protective cover [2].
easily.
2. Disconnect two Connectors [3].

Confidential
[8]
[6]
[9]
4038F2C053DA
[8]
[7]
4038F2C055DA
[7]
4. Disconnect two Connectors [6]. 6. Remove six Claws [8] and remove the Front Cover [9].
5. Remove four Screws [7].

Confidential
Transfer Belt Unit

C9 D9
[2]
[3]
4039F2C006DA
[4]
[1]
4039F2C005DA
[4]
P O IN T
After the Transfer Belt Unit has been removed from the Main Unit for other purposes [5]
than replacement, make sure to put it in the shipping plastic sheet whose color is
black, or wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. 3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Transfer Belt Unit [3] a little.
1. Open the Right Door. 4. Hold the position [4] as shown in the figure above and remove the Transfer Belt [5].
2. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Transfer Belt Unit [2]. When installing the Transfer Belt Unit, be careful of the following points.

Confidential
PH Interface Board (PWB-D)

C10
[2]
[1]
4038F2C097DA
Matched Not Matched
1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 1.

2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2].
Insert the Transfer Belt Unit into the Main Unit completely and make sure the
Drive Gear of the Transfer Belt Unit matches with that of the Main Unit. And then,

Confidential
[3]
[3]
[4]
[6] K
C
4038F2C098DA
M
Y
When connecting the Connector to the Photoconductor Unit Contact Assy, check the
[5] 4038F2C099DA color of Connector and connect it to corresponding that of the Imaging Unit.
3. Remove seven Screws [3], and remove the Right Door Switch Assy [4].
4. Remove four Screws [5] and remove four Photoconductor Unit Contact Assy [6] of each
color.

Confidential
[8]
[10] [9]
[11]
[7] 4038F2C100DA
[9] [10] 4038F2C102DB
7. Remove two Screws [9] and six tabs [10], and remove the PH Interface Board [11].
5. Remove eight Screws [7] and remove four Photoconductor Unit Roll Assy [8] of each color.
6. Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cables on the PH Interface Board.

Confidential
PH Unit
D10
[1]
[2] [3] 4038F2C106DA
When replacing the PH Unit, replace four units at the same time. When installing the Photoconductor Unit Guide rail, insert its end correctly to the
Even when the single Unit needs to be replaced, replace four units. mounting hole in the Main Unit side.
1. Remove three Screws [1], three Connectors [2], and three Photoconductor Unit Guide rails
[3].

Confidential
[4]
[5] 4038F2C107DA
[6]
[8]
4038F2C109DA
[7] 4038F2C108DB
When removing the Stopper, use care so that both ends of the Stopper will not open
but stay parallel as shown in the figure above. Keep using the Stopper after once
stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.
2. Remove the Flat Cable [4] and the Connector [5] of the PH Unit (Black).
3. Remove the Claw [6] and remove the Gear [7] of the PH Unit (Black). 4. Remove the Stopper [8] of the PH Unit (Black).

Confidential
[9]
[10] [1]
[11]
4038F2C110DA [2]
4037F2C113DB
[12]
[5] [5]
[6]
[14]
[6]
[3]
[13]
4037F2C111DB
5. Remove the PH Unit (Black) according to the following procedure. [4]

1. Move the front side of the PH Unit to left a little, and remove the Boss [9] from the locating 4037F2C114DA
hole [10].
2. Lift up the front side of the PH Unit a little. <Assembling procedure of the PH Unit>
3. Remove the Boss [11] at the rear side of the PH Unit from the locating hole [12].
1. Fit the back of the PH Unit [1] to the Plate Spring [2] of installation plate.
4. Remove the PH Unit [14].
6. Follow the same procedures to remove all PH Units. 2. Push the PH Unit [3] along the right side line of PH Unit installation plate all the way and fit
it into the Plate Spring [4].
C H E C K Since the back of the PH Unit is pushed to the right with the two Plate Springs [13],
P O IN T 3. Make sure that the two Bosses [5] at front and rear side of the PH Unit fit in the locating
remove it by tilting the backside of the PH Unit to the left as shown in the figure
hole [6].
above.

Confidential
[8]
4038F2C116DA
[7]
4038F2C115DA
4. Reinstall the Stopper [7]. 5. Reinstall the Gear [8].

When reinstalling the Stopper, use care so that both ends of the Stopper will not open 6. Connect the Connector and the Flat Cable.
but stay parallel as shown in the figure above. When reinstalling the Gear [8], make sure that the Claw of the Gear is fit in.
Keep using the Stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other When installing the Harness, make sure the Harness is hooked along with the
image troubles. Harness guide referring to the figure above.

Confidential
[9]
[10]
[9]
4038F2C117DA
7. Install the Photoconductor Unit Guide Rail [9].
Make sure that the two Claws [10] at rear end of the rail are fit in the locating hole on
the Main Unit.
8. Reinstall the Transfer Belt Unit.

9. Reinstall the Front Door.
10.Make skew adjustment of the PH Unit.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
When installing the PH Unit, make sure to conduct PH Unit skew adjustment
regardless of whether the Unit is new or not. (Refer to Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT)
(p313))

Confidential
4.3.4 Group 4 DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
CONTENT
Start
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover A A1 B1 C1 D1 Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover
(P. 194)
Exit Tray B
Upper Cover + Control Panel C B2 C2 D2 Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover
(P. 194)
DC Power Supply (PU1) D
B3 C3 D3 Exit Tray
(P. 195)
C4 D4 Upper Cover + Control Panel

(P. 196)
D5 DC Power Supply (PU1)

B Exit Tray
C Upper Cover + (P. 197)
Control Panel
A Rear Left Cover
A Front Left Cover
D DC Power Supply (PU1)

Confidential
A1 B1 B2
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover
C1 D1 C2 D2
[4] [4]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3] [1]
[5] [1] [2] [3] [4]
1. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Rear Left Cover [3]. 1. Open the Right Door [1].
2. Open the Front Door [1]. 2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Right Rear Cover [3].
3. Remove two Screws [4], and remove the Front Left Cover [5]. 3. Remove nine Screws [4], and remove the Rear Cover [5].

Confidential
B3
Exit Tray [5]
C3 D3
[3] [3]
[6]
[8]
[2]
[7]
4039F2C019DA
1. Open the Upper Fusing Cover [2]. 3. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Exit Sensor Holder [6].
2. Remove two Claws [3], and remove the Upper Fusing Cover [2]. 4. Remove three Screws [7], and remove the Exit Tray [8].

Confidential
Upper Cover + Control Panel

C4 D4
[3] [2] [4]

[1]
[5]
[1]
[5]
1. Remove four Screws [1]. 2. Remove the Ground terminal [2].

3. Remove the Connector [3], then remove the Upper Cover [4].
4. Remove five Screws [5], then remove the Control Panel [6].
Be careful when removing the Ground terminal because the edge of the Faston
terminal is sharp. Make sure to work with gloves on to avoid getting injured.

Confidential

D5
[2] [5]
[4] [4]
[1] [3] [1]
1. Remove nine Screws [1] and the Connector [2], then remove the protective sheet of the DC 2. Remove all the Connectors on the DC Power Supply.
Power Supply [3]. 3. Remove eight Screws [4], and remove the DC Power Supply [5].

Confidential
4.3.5 Group 5
CONTENT Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
B
Controller Board (PWB-P) A

C RTC Board (PWB-R)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) B
RTC Board (PWB-R) C
A Controller Board (PWB-P)

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Left Cover + Front Left

Cover (P. 200)
A2 B2 C2 Controller Board (PWB-P)

(P. 200)
B3 C3 Exit Tray
(P. 201)
B4 C4 Controller Board Mounting Bracket

(P. 202)
B5 Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) C5 RTC Board (PWB-R)

(P. 203) (P. 205)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover Controller Board (PWB-P)
C1 C2
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5] [1]
1. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Rear Left Cover [3]. 1. Remove six Screws [1].
2. Open the Front Door [1].

Confidential
B3
Exit Tray
C3
[2] [5] [4]
[3] [3]
[5] [5]
[3] [5] [4] [6]
[2]
4039F2C019DA
2. Remove two Connectors [2], the Type-B Guide rail [3], and three Harnesses [4]. 1. Open the Upper Fusing Cover [2].
3. Remove nine Screws [5], and remove the Controller Board [6]. 2. Remove two Claws [3], and remove the Upper Fusing Cover [2].

Confidential
B4
[5] Controller Board Mounting Bracket
C4
[1]
[2] [2]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[3]
[7]
1. Remove three Wire Saddles [1], six Screws [6], and four Clamp Cores [3], then remove the
Flat Cable Cover.

Confidential
B5
[6]
[5]
[8] [8]
[5] [5]
[9]
1. Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Mechanical Control Board.
2. Remove six Screws [8] and remove the Mechanical Control Board [9].
[7] [5]
2. Remove eleven Screws [5] and release the Edge Cover [6], and remove the Controller
Board Mounting Bracket [7].

Confidential
Parameter Chip (IC6)
Not Used
4037F2C061DB (CNSKF)
Not Used
(CNTM)
4037F2C534DA
When the Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) is replaced, relocate the Parameter
Chip (IC6).
Mount the Parameter Chip (IC6) of old Mechanical Control Board onto the new
Mechanical Control Board.
When the Parameter Chip (IC6) is mounted, precisely fit the directions of each
A. Be careful when assembling since there are some Connectors which are not used
When installing the Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) , secure the Harness to on the Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M).
the original location with the Wire Saddle.
When the Control Board is replaced, be sure to update the Firmware to the latest
version.

Confidential
RTC Board (PWB-R)

C5
[1] 4039F2C034DA
[3]
[2]
1. Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove two Screws [2], and remove the RTC Board [3].

Confidential
4.3.6 Group 6
Paper Width
<Base of the Main Unit> B Detection Unit
CONTENT
Standard Paper Cassette A

Paper Width Detection Unit B
Start
A1 B1 Standard Paper Cassette

(P. 207)
B2 Optional Cassette
(P. 208)
*When the Optional Cassette is installed
B3 Paper Width Detection Unit
(P. 209)
A Standard Paper Cassette

Confidential
A1 B1
Standard Paper Cassette
[1]
[2]
[2]
1. Slide out the Standard Paper Cassette [1]. 2. Slide out the Standard Paper Cassette with pressing the Slide Locks [2] at both ends.

Confidential
B2
Optional Cassette
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
1. Slide out the Optional Cassette [1]. 2. Remove the Screw [2] and remove the Stopper [3].
3. Remove the Optional Cassette with while pressing the Slide Lock [4].

Confidential
B3
Paper Width Detection Unit
[1] [A]
1. Remove the Paper Width Detection Unit pushing it toward the Right Door, with pushing the 2. Remove two Connectors and release the Harness from the tab of the Paper Width Detection
Knob [A] on the upper inside wall of the Tray toward the Right Door. Unit, then remove the Paper Width Detection Unit.
When the Paper Width Detection Unit has been removed, connect the Connector to
the Sensor before installing the Sensor to the Unit, And then install the Unit to the
Main Unit. This procedure make the work easier.
When installing the Paper Width Detection Unit, check four Claws of the Paper
Width Detection Unit so that they don't come off the Main Unit.

Confidential
4.3.7 Group 7 C IDC Sensor/2 (SE2) C IDC Sensor/1 (SE1)
CONTENT
MP tray Left Cover
+ MP tray Right Cover A
+ Tray Extension
Multi Bypass Unit B

IDC Sensor/1 (SE1) + IDC Sensor/2 (SE2) C
Feed Roller (MP tray) D
Separation Roller (MP tray) E
D Feed Roller
E Separation Roller
A MP tray Right Cover
A Tray Extension
A MP tray Left Cover B Multi Bypass Unit

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 MP tray Left Cover + MP tray Right

Cover + Tray Extension
D1 E1 (P. 212)
B2 C2 Multi Bypass Unit

D2 E2 (P. 212)
C3 Transfer Belt Unit D3 Feed Roller (MP tray) E3 Separation Roller (MP tray)
(P. 215) (P. 218) (P. 220)
C4 IDC Sensor/1 (SE1) +

IDC Sensor/2 (SE2)
(P. 216)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 MP tray Left Cover B2 C2

+ MP tray Right Cover Multi Bypass Unit
D1 E1 + Tray Extension D2 E2
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4] [1]
[5]
[3]
4038F2C103DA
4039F2C017DA
1. Remove the Claw [1] and remove the MP tray Left Cover [2]. 1. Disconnect four Connectors [1].
2. Remove the Screw [3] and remove the MP tray Right Cover [4]. C H E C K Black Connector in the Main Unit Side is not used.
P O IN T
3. Remove the Tray Extension [5].

Confidential
[2]
[1]
Boss
[3]
[3]
[4]
2. Open the right door. When assembling the Guide again after the Guide has been removed for some reason,
3. Disengage the boss of the guide [1] to free the guide [1]. insert the Hinge to the position as shown in the figure above. Additionally, when
4. Remove one Screw [2]. changing the position of the Hinge, once pull out the Hinge and install it again. If the
position is changed with the Hinge installed, D-shaped slot may be damaged under
5. Remove four Screws [3] and remove the Multi Bypass Unit [4].
load.

Confidential
Guide
4038F2C105DA
Insert the Guide with pushing it down to the Main Unit so that the Guide gets into the Insert the Multi Bypass Unit to the Main Unit after fitting the position of Dowels as
lower side of the Main Unit Cover. shown in the figure above.

Confidential
C3
Transfer Belt Unit
[2]
[3]
4039F2C006DA
[4]
[1]
4039F2C005DA
[4]
P O IN T
After the Transfer Belt Unit has been removed from the Main Unit for other purposes [5]
black, or wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. 3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Transfer Belt Unit [3] a little.
1. Open the Right Door. 4. Hold the position [4] as shown in the figure above and remove the Transfer Belt [5].
2. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Transfer Belt Unit [2]. When installing the Transfer Belt Unit, be careful of the following points.

Confidential
C4
IDC Sensor/1 (SE1) + IDC Sensor/2 (SE2)
[2] [1]
4038F2C169DA
Matched Not Matched
1. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Plate Spring [2].
Insert the Transfer Belt Unit into the Main Unit completely and make sure the
Drive Gear of the Transfer Belt Unit matches with that of the Main Unit. And then,

Confidential
[5]
[8]
[7]
[9]
4038F2C171DA
[3] [4]
[12]
[6]
[10]
[11]
5. Remove two Claws [7] of both sides, and remove the Sensor cover [8].
2. Remove the Shoulder Screw [3] and the Screw [4]. Use care not to miss the spring [9].
3. Remove the Vertical Transport Assy [5] as shown in the figure above.
Since multiple Connectors [6] are connected to the backside of the Vertical Transport 6. Remove two Screws [10] and the Connector [11], and then remove the IDC sensor/1 (front
Assy, do not pull it by force. side) [12].
4. Remove two Connectors [6] of the backside of the Vertical Transport Assy.

Confidential
Feed Roller (MP tray)

D3
[2]
[13]
[1]
4038F2C004DA
4038F2C173DA
[3]
7. Repeat the steps from 5 to 6 and remove the IDC sensor/2 (rear side) [13].
4038F2C005DA
C H E C K The separation roller should be replaced, whenever the feed roller is replaced.
P O IN T
1. Snap of the E-ring [1], and remove paper feed clutch [2].
2. Remove the Gear [3].

Confidential
[4]
[5]
4038F2C006DB
[8]
[9]
[6]
4038F2C008DB
[8]
[7]
4038F2C007DB
3. Snap off the E-ring [4] and remove the Bearing [5]. 5. Remove the Feed Roller [8].
4. Snap off two C-ring [6], and remove the Bearing [7]. A D J U S T M E N T When installing the Feed Roller with a new one, make sure to reset the life counter.
R E Q U IR E D

Confidential
Separation Roller (MP tray)

E3
[7]
[5]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C009DA
[6]
[8] 4038F2C502DA
[3]
[4]
3. Snap off the C-clip [5], and remove the spring [6] and the guide plate [7]. Remove the
4038F2C010DA Separation Roller [8].
C H E C K The pickup roller should be replaced, whenever the separation roller is replaced.
P O IN T
1. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Ground terminal [2].
2. Remove the Screw [3], and remove the separation roller assy [4].

Confidential
4.3.8 Group 8
A Right Rear Cover A Rear Cover
CONTENT
Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover A

Standard cassette Paper Size Board (PWB-I) B
Fusing Drive Motor (M4) C
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) D
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6) E
E Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
D Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
C Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
B Standard cassette Paper Size Board (PWB-I)

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover

D1 E1 (P. 223)
B2 Standard cassette Paper Size C2 Fusing Drive Motor (M4) D2 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) E2 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
Board (PWB-I) (P. 223) (P. 224) (P. 225) (P. 225)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2 Standard cassette Paper Size Board

Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover
(PWB-I)
D1 E1
[4]
[2] [3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

[1] 4038F2C088DA
1. Open the Right Door [1]. 1. Slide out the Paper Cassette 1.
2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Right Rear Cover [3]. 2. Remove two Screws [1], the Connector [2] and remove the Standard cassette Paper Size
3. Remove nine Screws [4], and remove the Rear Cover [5]. Board Assy (PWB-I) [3].

Confidential
C2
Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
[5] [3]
[4] [2]
4038F2C516DA [1] 4039F2C518DA
3. Remove the Lever [4]. 1. Remove the Connector [1] and two Screws [2], and remove the Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
4. Remove the Standard cassette Paper Size Board (PWB-I) [5]. [3].
Be cautious for working not to deform the Lever parts.

Confidential
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
D2 E2
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
1. Remove the Connector [1] and two Screws [2], and remove the Toner Supply Motor C/K
[3].
1. Remove the Connector [1] and two Screws [2], and remove the Toner Supply Motor Y/M
[3].
When driving the Screw [2], be cautious not to pinch the Harness.

Confidential
4.3.9 Group 9
C Main Motor (M1)
CONTENT
B Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
Color Developing Motor (M3) A

A Color Developing
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Motor (M3)
B
Main Motor (M1) C

Confidential
Start

(P. 228)
A2 Color Developing Motor (M3) B2 Color PC Drum Motor (M2) C2 Main Motor (M1)
(P. 228) (P. 229) (P. 229)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2
Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover Color Developing Motor (M3)
C1
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1] [2]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4] 4038F2C149DA
1. Open the Right Door [1]. 1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color Developing Motor
2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Right Rear Cover [3]. [3].

Confidential
B2
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Main Motor (M1)
C2
[1]
[3] [2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
4038F2C150DA 4039F2C517DA
1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [3]. 1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Main Motor [3].

Confidential
4.3.10 Group 10 A High Voltage Unit (HV1)
CONTENT D 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction

Clutch (CL3)
High Voltage Unit (HV1) A

Transfer Drive Assy B
Fusing Drive Assy C
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3) D
B Transfer Drive Assy

C Fusing Drive Assy

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 D1 Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover C8 D8 Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover
(P. 232) (P. 241)
A2 B2 C2 D2 High Voltage Unit (HV1) C9 D9 Exit Tray

(P. 232) (P. 241)
B3 C3 D3 Color Developing Motor (M3) C10 D10 Fusing Drive Assy

(P. 234) (P. 242)
B4 Color PC Drum Motor (M2) D11 1st Image Transfer Pressure/

(P. 234) Retraction Clutch (CL3)
(P. 242)
B5 C4 D4 Main Motor (M1)

(P. 235)
B6 C5 D5 Transfer Drive Assy

(P. 235)
C6 D6 Fusing Unit
(P. 238)
C7 D7 Transfer Belt Unit

(P. 239)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover High Voltage Unit (HV1)
C1 D1 C2 D2
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

[2]
[3]
1. Open the Right Door [1]. [4]

2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Right Rear Cover [3].
1. Disconnect four Connectors [1].

2. Remove five Screws [2] and the Tab [3], and remove the High Voltage Unit [4].

Confidential
Terminal end position Figure 1 M Mark
Figure 2
P Mark
4038F2C087DA
Make sure following things when installing the High Voltage Unit (HV1). Be cautious not to install the wrong Screw because two types of Screws [2] are
Terminal end surely contacts (Refer to Figure 1). used.
Tab [5] surely set up (Refer to Figure 2). M Mark: Screws for installing metallic parts (Space between thread is small).
P Mark: Screws for installing plastic parts (Space between thread is large).

Confidential
B3 B4
Color Developing Motor (M3) Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
C3 D3
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
4038F2C149DA 4038F2C150DA
1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color Developing Motor 1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [3].
[3].

Confidential
B5 B6
Main Motor (M1) Transfer Drive Assy
C4 D4 C5 D6
[1]
[2]
[3] [3]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C517DA
4038F2C118DA
1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Main Motor [3]. 1. Remove three Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2] of the Right Door and
spring [3].
C H E C K Remove the spring with its tension loosened by declining right before the Left Door is
P O IN T
closed.

Confidential
[8]
[4] 4038F2C119DA [7]

[9] [10] [9]
[5]
[6]
2. Remove the Shoulder Screw [4].

3. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Metal blanking plate [6].
[11] [9] 4038F2C121DA

4. Remove two Screws [7] and remove the Rear Handle Assy Protect Cover [8].
5. Remove five Screws [9] and the Connector [10], and remove the Rear Handle Assy [11].

Confidential
[14] [13]
[12]
[11]
[12]
[10]
[13] 4038F2C123DA
C H E C K
[11] P O IN T
4038F2C122DA
6. Remove two Harnesses [12] from four Wire Saddles [11]. 7. Remove eight Screws [13], and remove the Transport Drive Assy [14].
C H E C K Screws [13] secure the Transfer Drive Assy are shown by mark.
P O IN T
Never remove the Screws other than shown by mark.

Confidential
Fusing Unit
C6 D6
[4]
[1]
[2]
[5]
4039F2C012DA
[3] 4039F2C010DA
[6]
4039F2C013DA
4039F2C011DA
Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down. 5. Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Connector protective cover [5].
6. Disconnect two Connectors [6].
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then
wait for about 20 minutes.
3. Remove two Claws [1], and remove the Exit Tray Connector protective cover [2].

Confidential
Transfer Belt Unit

C7 D7
[2]
[8]
[1]
4039F2C005DA
[7] 4039F2C014DA
P O IN T
7. Open the Right Door. After the Transfer Belt Unit has been removed from the Main Unit for other purposes
8. Open the Fusing Unit Cover.
black, or wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place.
9. Remove two Screws [7], and remove the Fusing unit [8]. 1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Transfer Belt Unit [2].

Confidential
[3]
4039F2C006DA
[4]
[4]
Matched Not Matched
[5]
3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Transfer Belt Unit [3] a little. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit into the Main Unit completely and make sure the
4. Hold the position [4] as shown in the figure above and remove the Transfer Belt [5]. Drive Gear of the Transfer Belt Unit matches with that of the Main Unit. And then,
When installing the Transfer Belt Unit, be careful of the following points.

Confidential
Rear Left Cover + Front Left Cover Exit Tray

C8 D8 C9 D9
[4]
[2] [3] [3]
[3]
[5] [1] [2]
4039F2C019DA
1. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Rear Left Cover [3]. 1. Open the Upper Fusing Cover [2].
2. Open the Front Door [1]. 2. Remove two Claws [3], and remove the Upper Fusing Cover [2].

Confidential
[5] Fusing Drive Assy

C10 D10
[1]
[6]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[1]
1. Remove three Screws [1] from rear side of the Main body and remove the Metal Blanking Plate [2].

Confidential
[3]
[5]
[4]
4. Remove the Fusing Drive Assy pushing upward [5] the connection part of the Transfer Belt
from the right Door side.
2. Remove three Screws [3] from the rear side of the Main body.
3. Release the hook section of the Spring from the groove to the rear side from upper part of
Main Unit of the right rear side.

Confidential
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch (CL3)

D11
[1]
[4]
[2]
[6] [5]
3. Remove two Screws [4], three E-rings [5] and remove Install Board [6].
[3]
1. Remove two Screws [1] from the Fusing Drive Assy and remove the Fusing Drive Motor
[2].
2. Remove the E-ring [3].

Confidential
[8]
[7]
[10] [9]
4. Remove the Gear [7] and then remove the Gear [8].
5. Remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch [10] with the Shaft [9].

Confidential
4.3.11 Group 11
A Hopper Drive Assy
CONTENT
Hopper Drive Assy A

Standard Cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) B
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor
(PC6) C
B Standard cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)

C Retraction Position Sensor (PC6)

Confidential
Start

(P. 248)
A2 B2 C2 High Voltage Unit (HV1)

(P. 248)
A3 B3 C3 Color Developing Motor (M3)

(P. 250)
A4 B4 C4 Color PC Drum Motor (M2)

(P. 250)
A5 B5 C5 Main Motor (M1)

(P. 251)
A6 B6 C6 Transfer Drive Assy

(P. 251)
A7 Hopper Drive Assy B7 Standard Cassette Paper Feed C7 1st Image Transfer Pressure/
(P. 254) Retraction Position Sensor (PC6)
Clutch (CL2) (P. 256) (P. 256)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

[2]
[3]



Confidential
Figure 2
P Mark
4038F2C087DA

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
Color Developing Motor (M3) Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
C3 C4
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
4038F2C149DA 4038F2C150DA
1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color Developing Motor 1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [3].
[3].

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
Main Motor (M1) Transfer Drive Assy
C5 C6
[1]
[2]
[3] [3]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C517DA
4038F2C118DA
1. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Main Motor [3]. 1. Remove three Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2] of the Right Door and
spring [3].
C H E C K Remove the spring with its tension loosened by declining right before the Left Door is
P O IN T
closed.

Confidential
[8]
[4] 4038F2C119DA [7]

[9] [10] [9]
[5]
[6]

[11] [9] 4038F2C121DA


Confidential
[14] [13]
[12]
[11]
[12]
[10]
[13] 4038F2C123DA
C H E C K
[11] P O IN T
4038F2C122DA
6. Remove two Harnesses [12] from four Wire Saddles [11]. 7. Remove eight Screws [13], and remove the Transport Drive Assy [14].
C H E C K Screws [13] secure the Transfer Drive Assy are shown by mark.
P O IN T
Never remove the Screws other than shown by mark.

Confidential
A7
Hopper Drive Assy
[1]
[1]
[2] 4038F2C125DA
[1]
4038F2C124DB
1. Disconnect seven Connectors [1]. 2. Remove the Harness from four Wire Saddles [2].

Confidential
[8]
[3]
[7]
[5] [7]
[6]
[9]
[4]
4038F2C126DA
[8] 4038F2C127DA
3. Remove the Connector from the Cooling Fan Motor [3] and 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ 5. Remove four Screws [7] and two Claws [8], and remove the Hopper Drive Assy [9].
Retraction Position Sensor [4].
4. Remove two Screws [5] and remove the Cooling Fan Motor [3] and Duct [6]
simultaneously.
There is a possibility to install the wrong Connector because the Connector for the
Cooling Fan Motor has a same number of Pins as the Connector for the 1st Image
Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor. Check the Connector condition before
removing and not to install the wrong Connector when assembling.

Confidential
B7
Standard Cassette Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
[4] [5]
[2] [5] [6]
[1]
[2] [9]
[3]
[8]
1. Remove the E-ring [1], three Screws [2] and remove the Standard Cassette Feed Clutch
Cover [3].
[7]
2. Remove the E-ring[4] and three Screws [5] and then remove the Standard Cassette Feed Clutch
Cover [6].
3. Remove Upper conductive spring cover [9] by removing the screw [7] and Upper
conductive spring [8].

Confidential
[14]
[10]
[12]
[11]
[13] [12]
C H E C K
[11]
P O IN T
Before Releasing
After Releasing [10]
4. Remove the Conductive Spring Assy [11] by removing two Hooks [10]. [15] [16]
C H E C K The upper Hook of Conductive Spring Assy is disabled downside with tweezers.
P O IN T
5. Remove three Screws [12] and two E-rings [13] and then remove the Drive Cover [14].
6. Remove the Feed Clutch [16] by removing the Connector [15].

Confidential
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor

(PC6)
C7
[2]
[18]
[1]
[17]
[3]
Be cautious following things when installing the Feed Clutch. 1. Remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor Unit [3] by removing
Let the Cable into the Notch. the Screw [1] and Connector [2].
Match the Rotation Stopper of the Clutch [17] with the Tab of the Main Unit [18]
surely.

Confidential
When removing the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor, if the
Torsion Coil Spring has come off, correctly install it referring to the Figure. After
installing the Torsion Coil Spring, check if the Actuator operates normally.

Confidential
4.3.12 Group 12 Right Door

A
CONTENT
Right Door A
Near Empty Assy B
<Base of the Main Unit>
B Near Empty Assy

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right Rear Cover + Rear Cover

(P. 262)
A2 B2 High Voltage Unit (HV1)

(P. 262)
A3 Front Door B3 Standard cassette

(P. 264) (P. 267)
A4 Right Door B4 Optional Cassette

(P. 264) (P. 268)
B5 Near Empty Assy

(P. 269)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

[2]
[3]



Confidential
Figure 2
P Mark
4038F2C087DA

Confidential
A3 A4
Front Door Right Door
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1] 4038F2C038DB
[2] 4039F2C510DA
[3]
1. Open the Right Door.

4038F2C039DA 2. Remove three Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2] of the right door and
spring [3].
C H E C K Remove the Spring with its tension loosened by declining right before the Left Door is
2. Remove the Screw [1] each to remove the Right and Left Stoppers [2]. P O IN T
closed.

Confidential
[8]
[4] 4039F2C511DA [7]

[9] [10] [9]
[5]
[6]

[11] [9] 4039F2C513DA


Confidential
[12] [12] [12] [14] [13]
[12] 4039F2C514DA [13] 4039F2C515DA
7. Disconnect four Connectors [12]. 9. Remove two Screws [13], and remove the Front Right Cover [14].
8. Slide out the Paper Cassette 1.

Confidential
B3
Paper Cassette 1
[15] [17]
[1]
[16] 4039F2C516DA
10.Remove the Screw [15], and remove the Shaft [16]. 1. Slide out the Standard Paper Cassette [1].
11.Remove the Right Door [17].

Confidential
B4
Optional Cassette
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. Slide out the Standard Paper Cassette with pressing the Slide Locks [2] at both ends. 1. Slide out the Optional Cassette [1].

Confidential
B5
Near Empty Assy
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
2. Remove the Screw [2] and remove the Stopper [3].
1. Pick up and remove the Actuator from the front side.

2. Remove the Screw [1] from the rear side.

Confidential
[2]
[3] [4]
3. Put the Near Empty Assy [2] through the hole of the Flame bringing down the Near Empty 4. Remove two Connectors and remove the Near Empty Assy.
[2] Assy to the rear side from the front side.
When installing, insert the white Connector into the Connector of the front side [3]
and insert the blue Connector into the Connector of the rear side [4].

Confidential
4.3.13 Group 13
C Switchback Motor (M1DU)
CONTENT
Duplex Unit A
Duplex Unit Rear Cover B
Switchback Motor (M1DU) C
B Duplex Unit Rear Cover

Start
A1 B1 C1 Duplex Unit
(P. 272)
B2 C2 Rear Cover
(P. 273)
C3 Switchback Motor (M1DU)

(P. 273)
A Duplex Unit

Confidential
A1 B1 [5]
Duplex Unit
C1
[2]
[7]
[1]
[4] 4066F2C502DA
4066F2C500DA
[6]
[3]
4066F2C501DA
3. Open the Duplex Unit Door [4].
1. Release the tab [1], and remove the Connector Cover [2]. 4. Remove two Shoulder screws [5], and remove the Duplex Unit [7] while disabling Hook
2. Disconnect the Connector [3]. [6].

Confidential
B2
Duplex Unit Rear Cover Switchback Motor (M1DU)
C2 C3
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove three Screws [1], remove the Rear Cover [2].
[1]
1. Remove six Screws [1], and remove the Metal blanking plate.

Confidential
[3] [4] [2]
2. Remove the Connector [2] and two Screws [3], and remove the Switchback Motor [4].

Confidential
4.3.14 Group 14
CONTENT
Optional Cassette A
Rear Right Cover B
Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover C
C Rear Right Cover
C Rear Left Cover
A Optional Cassette DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
B Rear Right
Cover
Start
A1 Optional Cassette
(P. 276)
B1 Rear Right Cover

(P. 277)
C1 Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover

(P. 277)

Confidential
A1
Optional Cassette
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
1. Slide out the Optional Cassette [1]. 2. Remove the Screw [2] and remove the Stopper [3].

Confidential
B1
Right Rear Cover Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover
C1
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
4039F2C050DA
1. Remove two Screws [1] and remove the Right Rear Cover [2]. 1. Release two Tabs [1], remove the Connector Cover [2].

Confidential
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C048DA
[6]
[5]
[5]
2. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Rear Right Cover [4].
3. Remove three Screws [5], and remove the Rear Left Cover [6].

Confidential
4.3.15 Group 15
C Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
CONTENT
A Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
Control Board (PWB-Z-PC) A

Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC) B
Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC) C
B Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover

(P. 281)
A2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC) B2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC) C2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
(P. 282) (P. 283) (P. 285)

Confidential
A1 B1
Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover
C1
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1] 4038F2C048DA
[1] [6]
[5]
[5]
1. Release two Tabs [1], remove the Connector Cover [2]. 2. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Rear Right Cover [4].

Confidential
A2
[2]
[1]
4039F2C056DA
[5]
[4]
4039F2C054DA
[6]
[3] [5] 4039F2C057DA

4039F2C055DA
1. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Metal blanking plate [2]. 3. Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board.
2. Remove the Harness [4] from two Wire Saddles [3]. 4. Remove four Screws [5], and remove the Control Board [6].

Confidential
B2
Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)
[4]
[2]
[1] [3] 4039F2C058DA
4039F2C054DA [6] [5]
1. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Metal blanking plate [2].
4067F2C512DA
2. Remove the Harness [4] from the Edge cover [3].
3. Remove three Screws [5], and remove the Control Board Assy [6].

Confidential
[7] [10]
[8] [9] 4067F2C513DA [11]

4067F2C514DA
4. Remove two Claws [7] and the Connector [8], and remove the Paper Size Board Assy [9]. 5. Remove the Lever [10], and remove the Paper Size Board [11].
Be cautious for working not to deform the Lever parts.

Confidential
Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)

C2
[5] [3]
[2]
[4] 4038F2C166DA
[1] 4038F2C165DA
1. Slide out the Optional Cassette. 3. Disconnect the Connector [3].

2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2]. 4. Remove three Screws [4], and remove the Lift-Up Motor [5].

Confidential
4.3.16 Group 16
CONTENT B Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
A Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC) A

Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) B
Start
A1 B1 Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover

(P. 287)
A2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)

(P. 288)
B2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)

(P. 289)

Confidential
A1 B1
Rear Right Cover + Rear Left Cover
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1] 4038F2C048DA
[1] [6]
[5]
[5]
1. Release two Tabs [1], remove the Connector Cover [2]. 2. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Rear Right Cover [4].

Confidential
A2
[4] [5]
[2]
[3] 4038F2C167DA
[1] 4038F2C165DA
1. Slide out the Optional Casset. 3. Remove the Harness of the Motor Assy [4] from five Wire Saddles [3].
2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2]. 4. Disconnect two Connectors [5].

Confidential
B2
[7] Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
[6]
[2]
[8]
4038F2C168DA
[1] 4038F2C165DA
[9]
5. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Motor Assy [7]. 1. Slide out the Optional Cassette.
6. Remove two Screws [8], and remove the Paper Feed Motor [9]. 2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement plate [2].

Confidential
[7]
[6]
[4] [5]
[8] 4038F2C168DA
[3] 4038F2C167DA
3. Remove the Harness of the Motor Assy [4] from five Wire Saddles [3].
4. Disconnect two Connectors [5]. [9] 4038F2C520DA
5. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Motor Assy [7].
6. Remove two Screws [8], and remove the Vertical Transport Motor [9].

Confidential
4.3.17 Group 17 DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
CONTENT Start
Vertical Transport Door A A1 B1 Vertical Transport Door

C1 D1
(P. 292)
Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy B
Feed Roller (Optional Cassette Unit) B2 Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy
C (P. 292)
C2 D2
Separation Roller (Optional Cassette Unit) D
C3 Separation Roller (Opt. Cassette Unit) D3 Right Rear Cover
(P. 293) (P. 294)
D4 Feed Roller (Opt. Cassette Unit)

(P. 294)
B Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy
C Feed Roller
D Separation Roller
A Vertical Transport Door

Confidential
A1 B1 B2
Vertical Transport Door Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy
C1 D1 C2 D2
[2]
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
OK NG
4039F2C048DA
1. Slide out the paper cassette. 1. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the jam processing cover [2].
2. Open the Vertical Transport Door. Make sure the position of the polyester film when installing the jam processing cover.
3. Remove two Claws [1], and remove the Vertical Transport Door [2].

Confidential
Separation Roller (Optional Cassette Unit)

C3
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C508DA
[3]
[9] [7]
[6]
4038F2C013DA
[5]
4038F2C559DA
2. Remove two Screws [3] and the Separation Roller Installation Plate Assy [4]. 1. Remove two C-rings [1] and the shaft [2], and remove the separation roller fixing plate assy
[3].
Use care not to miss the spring [4].
2. Remove the C-ring [5] and guide [6], and remove the Separation Roller [7].

Confidential
Right Rear Cover Feed Roller (Optional Paper Cassette)

D3 D4
[2]
[1]
[1] 4039F2C051DA
4039F2C050DA
[3] [2]
1. Remove two Screws [1] and remove the Right Rear Cover [2].
4067F2C501DA
C H E C K The separation roller should be replaced, whenever the pickup roller is replaced.
P O IN T

2. Remove the Screw [2] and remove the Reinforcement plate [3].

Confidential
[9]
[5]
[4]
[4]
4067F2C502DA
[6] 4067F2C504DA
[10] [8]
[12]
[11] [13]
[11]
[14]
4067F2C510DA
[6]
[7] 4067F2C503DA 4067F2C511DA
3. Remove four Screws [4] and remove the pickup roller assy [5]. 5. Remove two Screws [8] and pickup roller cover 9].
4. Remove two Screws [6] and the installation flame [7] of the separation roller installation 6. Remove two C-rings [10] and two bushings [11], and remove the pickup roller assy [12].
plate assy. 7. Snap off the C-ring [13], and remove the Pickup Roller [14].

Confidential
[16]
[21]
[20]
[15]
4067F2C505DA
[22] 4067F2C507DA
[25]
[23] [23] [26]
[17]
[19]
[24]
[18]
[27]
4067F2C509DA
4067F2C508DA
8. Remove the C-ring [15] and bushing [16]. 10.Remove the C-ring [20] and bushing [21], and remove the shaft assy [22].
9. Remove the C-ring [18] and gear [19] while sliding out the shaft assy [17] in the direction 11.Remove two E-rings [23] and bushing [24], and remove the pickup roller fixing plate assy
indicated in the figure above. [25].
12.Remove the C-ring [26] and Pickup Roller [27].
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
When installing the Pickup Roller with a new one, make sure to reset the life counter.

Confidential
4.4 Others [1]COOLING FAN MOTOR/2 (M22)
The specific disassembling and assembling procedures are not explained, and
only points in work are shown.
[5]
[1]
Screw
[2]
Connector
[3]
Screw
[4]
4039F5C502DA
[1] Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) p.297

[2] Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12) p.298 Turn the side that the label
[3] Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) p.298 is attached on to the front.
Rear Top
[4] Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) p.298
[5] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11) p.299 Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Others 297

Confidential
[2]COOLING FAN MOTOR/1 (M12) [4]POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN MOTOR/1 (M8)
Connector
Connector
Rear Right
Turn the side that the label
is attached on to the back.
Screw
Screw

is attached on to the front.
Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8)
[3]OZONE VENTILATION FAN MOTOR (M14)
Connector
Rear Right
Screw
Turn the side that the label Left Side Right

is attached on to the front. Protective Sheet of DC Power Supply
(Refer to DC Power Supply (PU1) (p193))
Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14)

Confidential
[5]FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR/2 (M11)

Connector
is attached on to the back.
Screw
Top Right
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11)

Confidential
[1]WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR (PC8)
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
Rear Right
[3]
Connector
[4]
4039F5C503DA
[1] Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8) p.300

[2] Front Door Switch/2 (S4) p.301
[3] Front Door Switch/1 (S3) p.301
[4] Main Power Switch (S1) p.302
[5] Primary Interlock Switch (S2) p.302
[6] Right Door Switch (S5) p.303

Confidential
[2]FRONT DOOR SWITCH/2 (S4) [3]FRONT DOOR SWITCH/1 (S3)
Front Door Switch/2 (S4) Screw
Front Left
Front Left
Screw
Front Door
When installing the Front Door Switch/2 (S4), refer to the following Switch/1 (S3)
figure and notice the color of the Connector. Connector
Connector

Confidential
[4]MAIN POWER SWITCH (S1)
Refer to the below figure, note the color Install the Switch in the following
of the Connector and the color of the DC Power Supply Connector Hook direction.
Harness.
Main Power
Switch (S1)
Front Left
Connector Hook
[5]PRIMARY INTERLOCK SWITCH (S2)
Refer to the below figure, note the color Install the Switch in the following
Connector Cover direction.
of the Connector and the color of the
Harness.
Right Door Switch Assy

(Refer to PH Interface
Board (PWB-D) (p175))
Connector Hook

Confidential
[6]RIGHT DOOR SWITCH (S5) When installing the Right Door Switch, be careful the following
points.
Right Door Switch (S5) Be careful not to insert the red and white connectors into the
incorrect place.
Be careful to hook the Actuator to the Spring properly.
Actuator
Connector
Front Right

Confidential
[1]DEVELOPING CLUTCH/K (CL4)

[1]
[2]
[3] Developing Clutch/K (CL4)
[4]
Connector
Match the Rotation Stopper Rear Left

of the Clutch with the tab of
4039F5C505DA
the Main Unit.
[1] Developing Clutch/K (CL4) p.304

[2] MP tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC14) p.305
[3] MP tray Paper Feed Clutch (CL5) p.305
[4] MP tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC13) p.305

Confidential
[2]MP TRAY LIFT-UP SENSOR (PC14) [4]MP TRAY PAPER EMPTY SENSOR (PC13)
Multi Bypass Unit (Refer to Multi Bypass Unit (Refer to

Multi Bypass Unit (p210)) Multi Bypass Unit (p210))
Tray1 Lift-Up Sensor (PC14)
Connector
[3]MP TRAY PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL5)
Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
Multi Bypass Unit (Refer to

Multi Bypass Unit (p210))
E-ring
Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC13)
Connector

Confidential
[1]CD PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1 (PC4-PC)

[4]
[3] [5]
[2]
[1] [6] Rear Center
[7]
[8]
[9]
4039F5C506DA
[1] CD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC4-PC) p.306

[2] Set Sensor (PC2-PC) p.307
[3] CD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC3-PC) p.307
[4] Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC1-PC) p.308
[5] Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC) p.309
[6] Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) p.309
[7] Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC) p.309
[8] Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC) p.309
[9] Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC) p.309

Confidential
[2]SET SENSOR (PC2-PC) [3]CD PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2 (PC3-PC)
Rear Center
Rear Center
Connector
Set Sensor (PC2-PC)

Confidential
[4]PAPER NEAR-EMPTY SENSOR (PC1-PC)
Rear Center
Connector
Screw

Confidential
[5]DOOR SET SENSOR (PC5-PC)

[6]VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR (PC8-PC)
[7]PAPER TAKE-UP SENSOR (PC9-PC)
[8]PAPER EMPTY SENSOR (PC6-PC)
[9]LIFT-UP SENSOR (PC7-PC)
Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC)
Connector
Connector
Lift-Up Sensor
Connector (PC7-PC)
Connector
Feed Roller Assy

(p.294 )
Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC)

Confidential
[1]DUPLEX UNIT DOOR SET SENSOR (PCIDU)

[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4038F5C512DA
Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor
[1] Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (PCIDU) p.309

[2] Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M2DU) p.311
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2DU) p.312
[4] Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) p.312 Connector
[5] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1DU) p.312

Confidential
[2]DUPLEX UNIT TRANSPORT MOTOR (M2DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Motor
Connector Screw (+ Nut) Screw (+ Nut)

Confidential
[3]DUPLEX UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR 1 (PC1DU)

[4]DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD (PWB-A DU)
[5]DUPLEX UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR 2 (PC2DU)
Duplex Control Board Screw
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1

Connector Screw Connector
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1

Confidential
CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
Confidential
5.1 Adjustment Item

The table below shows the adjustment item (including life counter clear) required when the specified part/unit is fixed or replaced.
Part/Unit Timing Item Adjustment Procedure Required Jig & Tool Reference
PH unit When assembling (Whether the Skew Adjustment Adjust the gradient of the PH unit following None
parts are new or old) the values printed on the maintenance status Page 318
sheet.
MP Tray Paper Guide Mechanism When assembling MP Tray Paper Mechanical Adjustment Position the specified part when assembling. None
Page 318
Guide Mechanism
Main Board After replaced with a new one Writing of USB-ID Execute the item using the dedicated EPSON Page Printer Main
Page 318
program. Board Initialization Tool
Maintenance unit After replaced with a new one Reset Life Counter Execute using the Maintenance Menu. None Page 318
Feed roller (C2) After replaced with a new one Reset Life Counter Execute using the Maintenance Menu. None Page 318
--- If needed Controller Firmware Update Refer to the explaining page Page 318
If needed Engine Controller Firmware Refer to the explaining page
--- Page 318
Update
ADJUSTMENT Adjustment Item 314

Confidential
5.2 Adjustment
5.2.1 Skew Adjustment

PURPOSE
Adjust the gradient of the PH unit of each color and prevent the image skew from
occurring.
PROCEDURE
1. After replacing or reinstalling the PH units, start the printer in the maintenance
mode.
2. The Calibration is executed automatically.
4038F3C006DB
3. After finishing the Calibration, print the Maintenance Status Sheet and check the Figure 5-1. Skew Adjustment
each value of the Y/M/C by the Registration items which are at the bottom of the
sheet.
This value shows the adjusting the dial rotation step number to adjust the skew.
4. When the displayed value is out of the standard, open the front cover and adjust by
turning the Skew adjusting dial (screw) on only the displayed value. Registration
Standard: 4
Adjusting direction: Positive value = Clockwise/Negative value =
Counterclockwise
5. Close the front cover and then the Calibration is executed automatically again.
6. After finishing the Calibration, print the Maintenance Status Sheet again and
check that Y/M/C value of the Registration is within the standard. (In case Y/M/
C value of the Registration is out of the standard, adjust again from the
procedure 4)
C H E C K Skew Adjustment corrects the gradient of the PH unit Y, M,

P O IN T C based on the PH unit K. Correction for the PH unit K as a
standard is not required.
Figure 5-2. Maintenance Status Sheet
ADJUSTMENT Adjustment 315

Confidential
5.2.2 MP Tray Mechanical Adjustment

[3]
PURPOSE [1]
Adjust the mounting location of the MP tray to operate the MP tray properly.
PROCEDURE
1. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the rack
gear [2] are aligned in a straight line.
[2]
2. Place the MP tray to match the on the surface of the MP tray Unit with the
center of the scale.
3. After installing the base plate, check whether Paper Guide operates smoothly.
[3]
[2]
(%& #
(%& #
Figure 5-3. MP Tray Mechanical Adjustment

Confidential
5.2.3 Reset Life Counter Table 5-1. Reset Life Counter List
Unit Menu Name
PURPOSE Maintenance unit Reset Maint Counter
Whenever the parts (units) which record the life counter (consumption) in the printer
Feed Roller (C2) Reset LC2 Counter
are replaced with new one, the life counter of corresponding the parts must be reset (set
to "0"). Feed Roller (C3) Reset LC3 Counter
Feed Roller (C4) Reset LC4 Counter
PROCEDURE
1. Assemble the printer completely.

2. Turn the printer on to keep on pressing [Left], [Up], [Down] and [Right].
3. After the printer has been activated and MAINTENANCE MODE is displayed
on the LCD panel, release the buttons which are being pressed.
4. Press [Up] or [Down] a few times to select Maintenance Menu and press [OK].
5. Press [Up] or [Down] a few times to select Reset xxxxx Counter and press [OK]
to reset the life counter.

Confidential
5.2.4 Writing USB ID INSTALLING THE PROGRAM & BASIC OPERATION
PURPOSE 1. Copy a set of files of Main Board initial setting tool to a folder created on the
PC.
This printer includes USB interface as standard. A unique USB ID has been assigned to
each printer to be identified by a host PC connected via the USB interface. The USB ID C H E C K The set of files of Main Board initial setting tool must be stored in
information is stored on the nonvolatile memory on the Main Board. Therefore, P O IN T one folder.
whenever the Main Board is replaced, the ID must be written to the new board. As for
this product, the model ID information is stored, it must also be written to the board.
REQUIRED TOOL 2. Double click on the program icon [ ] to start up the program, and select the
model name in the [Model Selection].
The program to be used for writing the USB-ID and the required operating 3. In the [Port Selection], select the port connected to the printer.
environment are as follows.
Program name C H E C K The Auto selection allows you to search printers connected to the
P O IN T PC, and establish a connection with the first detected printer. When
EPSON Page Printer Main Board Initialization Tool multiple printers are connected, however, specify the port name
rather than using the Auto selection since a printer detected by
Operating environment
the auto detection varies according to the communication status.
SO
Windows95/OSR2.0 or later, Windows98, Windows Me, Windows
2000, Windows UP
Interface to be used
USB
Figure 5-4. Basic Operation

Confidential
WRITING METHOD
USB ID
The method of writing USB ID differs according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the
condition. For the operational procedure, follow the instructions shown by the program.
Table 5-2. Writing Method

Writing method
Condition of Main Board Check of the previous ID Description
(button name)
Communication between PC and the Main The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet Store optional ID Enter the previous ID to write it to the new Main Board.
Board. is impossible. or any other sheet that has already been printed out.
There is no way to confirm the previous ID. Store auto- The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial number of the
generated NEW ID printer and write it into the new Main Board.
Communication between PC and the Main (The previous ID can be retrieved from the OLD ID Retrieval/ Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved ID into the new
Board is possible. previous Main Board) Restore board.
Store optional ID Store auto-generated NEW ID OLD ID Retrieval/Restore
CONFIRMING THE WRITTEN ID
When writing USB ID is finished, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached to the printer. (Refer to 7.5.1
Configuration Status Sheet on page 352)

Confidential
5.3 Firmware Update

This explains update method following the Firmware. Select the appropriate method
depending on the situation because there are multiple data formats and update methods
corresponding to the multiple data format.
Table 5-3. Update method for Firmware

Section Data Format Update method
Controller CRB Format Update method 1 (P. 321)
RCC Format Update method 2 (P. 323)
EFU Format Update method 4 (P. 327)
Update method 5 (P. 329)
Engine Controller BIN Format Update method 3 (P. 325)
Controller + Engine EFU Format Update method 4 (P. 327)
Controller Update method 5 (P. 329)
ADJUSTMENT Firmware Update 320

Confidential
UPDATE METHOD 1 Step Explanation LCD Panel

5 Start up the Firmware Update Tool.
Required Tool Specify the port and the program update file
on the selection window of the tool.
Computer
USB cable
Firmware Update Tool ---
Control Panel Special Operation

Required
Step Explanation LCD Panel

1 Print a Configuration Status Sheet, and check 6 Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool
--- screen.
the current version.
2 After turning the power off for both the
printer and computer, connect them with a
USB cable.
Before connecting the USB cable, ---
make sure to disconnect other
interface cables from the printer.
3 Turn the computer on and copy the firmware

data file (CRB format) to any directory of the --- 7 Completion pop-up window will be
computer. displayed when the data transfer is finished.
4 Turn the printer ON while holding down the Click [OK].
[Start/Stop], [Job Cancel], and [Down]
buttons.
(The printer will start up in Controller
Firmware Update Mode.)
Confirm that both the old and new firmware

versions are displayed on the LCD, and press
the [OK] button on the control panel to start
the program update.

Confidential
Step Explanation LCD Panel

8 When the program update is finished, the
checksum will be indicated on the LCD.
Confirm the checksum.
9 Turn the printer OFF and ON to reboot the

---
printer.
10 Print a Configuration Status Sheet. ---
11 Confirm that the program firmware version
has been updated correctly by comparing the ---
status sheet with that printed in step 1.

Confidential
UPDATE METHOD 2 Step Explanation Panel display

Computer
USB cable

Not required
C H E C K In this method, update can be executed with the EPSON 5 Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool
P O IN T Firmware Updater instead of Firmware Update Tool. screen.
---
Step Explanation Panel display
1 Print a Configuration Status Sheet, and check
---
the current version.
2 Connect the printer to the computer with a
USB cable. Ready
Confirm that the Ready is displayed on the 6 Completion pop-up window will be
LCD. displayed when the data transfer is finished. Writing ROM P
Click [OK]. Don't poweroff nnn/mmm

data file (RCC format) to any directory of the ---
computer. The data LED flashes and Writing ROM P
will be displayed on the LCD when data
reception and program update are executed
on the printer.

Confidential

7 The data LED on the operation panel goes
off, confirm that the Ready is displayed on Ready
the LCD, turn the printer OFF and ON to
reboot the printer.


Confidential

Computer
USB cable

Required

1 Print a Configuration Status Sheet, and check 6 Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool
--- screen.
the current version (MCU version).
2 After turning the power off for both the
printer and computer, connect them with a
USB cable.
Before connecting the USB cable, ---
make sure to disconnect other
interface cables from the printer.

data file (BIN format) to any root directory of --- 7 Completion pop-up window will be
the computer. displayed when the data transfer is finished.
4 Turn the printer ON while holding down the Click [OK].
[Start/Stop], [Job Cancel], [Up], and [Down]
buttons. (The printer will start up in Engine
Controller Firmware Update Mode.)
Pressing the [OK] button on the printer

control panel executes the program update.

Confidential

8 When the program update is finished, the
checksum will be indicated on the LCD
panel.
Confirm the checksum.
9 Turn the printer OFF and ON to reboot the

printer.


Confidential

5 Enter the password set in the [Password
Required Tool Config Menu]. If the password is not set, F/W Update Mode
press the [OK] button.
USB memory stick
The firmware data file in the USB memory is
Control Panel Special Operation searched. Password
Required

1 Print a status sheet, and check the current
---
F/W Update Mode
version. Serching Files
2 Turn the printer OFF. ---
3 Insert the USB memory stick stored the
firmware data file (RCX or EFU format) to Please Wait
the USB host I/F of the printer.
Store the only firmware data
file to update to the USB --- 6 Select [Update] and press the [OK] button.
memory. F/W Update Mode
Store the firmware data to the
root directory of USB memory
Update
stick. File
4 Turn the product ON while holding down New Version
the [Job Cancel] + [Up] buttons. ---
F/W Update Mode is started up. Old Version
7 After the confirmation screen is displayed,
select [Yes] and press the [OK] button. F/W Update Mode
Update
Execute
File
No
New Version
Yes
Old Version

Confidential

8 Updating the firmware is executed.
Do not turn the printer OFF F/W Update Mode
during update. If aborted F/W Update : XX%
abnormally, the printer may not
be booted.
Don't power off
Please Wait
9 When the update complete screen is

displayed, turn the printer OFF and ON to F/W Update Mode
reboot the printer.
F/W Update : XX%
F/W power
Don't UpdateoffCompleted
RestartWait
Please a Printer
10 Print a status sheet and confirm that the ---

program firmware version has been updated.

Confidential
UPDATE METHOD 5 Step Explanation Program Screen

4 Check the Attention and click [Next].
Required Tool
Computer
USB cable
Epson Firmware Updater
C H E C K Install the printer driver before using Epson Firmware

P O IN T Updater. 5 Agree to the Software licence agreement
and click [Next].

Not required
Step Explanation Program Screen

1 After turning the power off for both the --- 6 Select the Firmware data (EFU format)
printer and computer, connect them with and click [Next].
a USB cable.
Before connecting the USB
cable, make sure to disconnect
other interface cables from the
product.
2 Turn the power on for both the printer and ---
computer.
7 Check that printer is not in the following
3 Activate Epson Firmware Updater and status and click [Next].
click [Next].
Printing
Copying
Warming up

Confidential
Step Explanation Program Screen

8 Check the version of the firmware being
updated and click [Next].
9 Read the notes concerning the update and

click [Next].
Check The status sheet is printed. box if
needed.
10 Update is started.
If The status sheet is printed. box is
checked at Step 9, update is started after
the status sheet is printed out.
11 After completing the update, reboot the

printer automatically.
When the screen on the right appears,
print the Configuration Status Sheet and
check that the version of Firmware is
updated. Click [Finish].

Confidential
CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
Confidential
6.1 Cleaning Do not use alcohol, thinner, or any other solvents. When using
these ones, follow the instructions of the procedures.
Clean the parts listed in the table below according to the printer condition. Be extremely careful not to make the internal parts of the
Table 6-1. Cleaning printer get wet.
Unit Cleaning point Cleaning Requirements A hard brush or cloth can scratch the product. Do not use them
to wipe the product.
Main unit Printer exterior surface When the exterior is stained (dirty or
dusty).
MAIN UNIT
PH window When white streaks (missing areas)
appear on the printing result. Printer exterior surface
Transfer belt When image quality problems such
as bands, unevenness or smudges Wipe the surface clean with a cloth wrung out of water.
occur.
Registration roller When the Registration roller is dirty
and it affects the image.
Area around the waste toner When area around the waste toner
collecting port collector is stained with toner.
Feed roller (Standard cassette (C1)) When malfunctions in paper feeding
Separation roller (Standard cassette such as multiple-sheet feed, non-
(C1)) feed, or skew occur frequently.
Feed roller (MP tray)

Separation roller (MP tray)
Optional Feed roller
cassette unit Separation roller
Transport roller
Duplex unit Transport roller Figure 6-1. Cleaning the Printer Surface
Ventilation Section When the Ventilation Section is dirty.
Make sure to turn the power switch OFF and unplug the power
code before cleaning to avoid electric shock, burn or any other
injuries.
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 332

Confidential
PH window Transfer belt

1. Open the Front Door. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the Transfer belt.
2. Remove the PH window cleaning jig.
3. Insert the PH window cleaning jig to the cleaning port and clean it by putting If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth
the jig back and forth a couple times. with a solvent.
Clean every PH window of YMCK.
Do not wipe out with water.
When solvent is used to dampen a cloth, do not use the ones
other than shown below:
Isopropyl alcohol, Ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7.
Cleaning jig
4038F2C547DA
Figure 6-3. Cleaning the Transfer belt
Registration roller
Cleaning port
Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the registration roller.
Cleaning jig
Registration roller
4038F2C548DA
Figure 6-2. Cleaning the PH window

Figure 6-4. Cleaning the Registration roller

Confidential
Area around the waste toner collecting port Separation roller (Standard cassette (C1))
Wipe the areas around the waste toner collecting port clean of spilled toner and Gently wipe the rubber part of the feed roller with a well-wrung cloth.
dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol.
Figure 6-7. Cleaning the separation roller

Figure 6-5. Cleaning the area around the waste toner collecting port
Feed roller (MP tray)

Feed roller (Standard cassette (C1))
Gently wipe the rubber part of the feed roller with a well-wrung cloth.
Figure 6-6. Cleaning the feed roller Figure 6-8. Cleaning the feed roller

Confidential
Separation roller (MP tray) Separation roller
Gently wipe the rubber part of the feed roller with a well-wrung cloth. Gently wipe the rubber part of the feed roller with a well-wrung cloth.
Figure 6-9. Cleaning the separation roller Figure 6-11. Cleaning the separation roller
Transport roller
OPTIONAL CASSETTE UNIT
Feed roller
Figure 6-12. Cleaning the transport roller
Figure 6-10. Cleaning the feed roller

Confidential
DUPLEX UNIT Ventilation Section (Outside)
Transport roller Wipe the outside of the ventilation section clean of dirt.
Figure 6-14. Cleaning the ventilation section (Outside)
Ventilation Section (Inside)
Wipe the inside of the ventilation section clean of dirt.
Figure 6-13. Cleaning the transport roller
Figure 6-15. Cleaning the ventilation section (Inside)

Confidential
CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
Confidential
7.1 Connection Diagram
ROM DIMM ROM DIMM RAM DIMM

(Program) (Option) (Option)
CN300 CN301 CN201
CN501 CN603 CN602
CN601
CN405 CN406 CN401 CN402 CN701 CN411
Type-B IEEE1284 USB Network USB Host

SIN_SCL
SAST
SWA_SI
SADO_A0
SAD1_CS2
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
LED0
LED1
LED2
BLED
+3.3V
GND
+5V
CN101
Tray1: MP tray
Tray2: Standard cassette unit
Tray3: Optional cassette unit1
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 338

Confidential
7.2 Wiring Diagram
Fusing unit
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
(20-4)
HARNESS (25-29)
S5
S4
S3
To transfer beltunit
PWB-P
PWB-P
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (25-25)
PWB-M PWB-M
PU1
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (10-8) WIRE HARNESS ASSY (3-4)
Code Part Name Code Part Name

PWB-P Controller Board PWB-P Controller Board
PWB-M Mechanical Control Board PWB-M Mechanical Control Board
PU1 DC Power Supply
S3 Front Door Switch/1
S4 Front Door Switch/2
S5 Right Door Switch
APPENDIX Wiring Diagram 339

Confidential
PWB-M
PU1
POWER CORD
(24-11) S2
S1
PWB-D
PWB-P
WIRE HARNESS
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (8-4) WIRE HARNESS ASSY (25-22) (2-11)
(24-7)

PWB-P Controller Board PU1 DC Power Supply
PWB-M Mechanical Control Board S1 Main Power Switch
PWB-D PH Interface Board S2 Primary Interlock Switch

Confidential
SE1
PC13 SE2
PC4
HARNESS ASSY PC1
(05-3)
SL2
CL5 WIRE HARNESS ASSY
(15-29)
PC14
CL1
Not used
CN TRY2
CN TRY1
WIRE HARNESS ASSY PWB-M PWB-M

(25-12) WIRE HARNESS ASSY CN SEN
(25-12)

PC13 MP tray Paper Empty Sensor SE1 IDC/Registration Sensor/1
PC14 MP tray Lift-Up Sensor SE2 IDC/Registration Sensor/2
CL5 MP tray Paper Feed Clutch PC1 Registration Roller Sensor
SL2 MP tray Pick-Up Solenoid PC4 OHP Sensor
CL1 Registration Roller Clutch

Confidential
M10
SE3
PC10
PC9
PWB-M HARNESS ASSY
(4-5)
CN HV2 PC12
PWB-I
CN HV1
PC11
PWB-M
HV1 CN MP
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (25-12) WIRE HARNESS ASSY (25-12)

HV1 High Voltage Unit PWB-I Paper Size Board
SE3 Temperature/Humidity Sensor PC9 Paper Take-up Sensor
M10 Suction Fan Motor PC10 Standard cassette Paper Empty Sensor
PC11 Standard cassette Paper Near-Empty Sensor
PC12 Standard cassette Device Detection Sensor

Confidential
PC3
PC7
M5 PWB-M
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
PC15 CL4
(14-26)
PC6
PC17 CL2 PC8

CN RC
CN PC
CN LP
PC16
PC18
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (25-12) PWB-M
M14 PWB-R

M5 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor PWB-R RTC Board
PC3 Fusing Loop Detect Sensor M14 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor
PC7 Lift-up Sensor CL2 Standard cassette Paper Feed Clutch
PC15 Black PC Drive Main Sensor CL4 Developing Clutch/K
PC16 Black PC Drive Sub Sensor PC6 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position Sensor
PC17 Color PC Drive Main Sensor PC8 Waste Toner Full Sensor
PC18 Color PC Drive Sub Sensor

Confidential
M11
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
(22-10)
M13
M7
M6
M4
M22
CN DM1
CL3 CN DM1 CN DM2
CN R2FAN
CN SM
M12
WIRE HARNESS ASSY CN DM3
M1 (25-18) PWB-M
M2
PWB-M
WIRE HARNESS ASSY M3

(25-18)

M1 Main Motor M2 Color PC Drum Motor
M11 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor M3 Color Developing Motor
M13 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 M4 Fusing Drive Motor
M22 Cooling Fan Motor/2 M6 Toner Supply Motor Y/M
CL3 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch M7 Toner Supply Motor C/K
M12 Cooling Fan Motor

Confidential
Code Part Name

PC7-PC Lift-Up Sensor
PC8-PC Vertical Transport Sensor
PC9-PC PC9-PC Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC8-PC
PC6-PC
WIRE HARNESS ASSY PC1-PC
PC7-PC
(1-20)
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
PC5-PC PC2-PC (5-20)
PCIDU
M2-PC PWB-M
M1DU
M1-PC PWB-I
WIRE HARNESS ASSY M3-PC CN CST

(5-26) WIRE HARNESS ASSY
PC4-PC
To PC3-PC (25-12)
low PWB-A DU
er WIRE HARNESS ASSY (5-17)
ca
ss
ette PWB-Z
M2DU
Code Part Name

WIRE HARNESS ASSY
PWB-M Mechanical Control Board
(2-22) PWB-M
PWB-I Standard cassette Paper Size Board
CN DUP
PWB-Z Control Board
M1-PC Paper Feed Motor
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
M2-PC Vertical Transport Motor (25-12)
M3-PC Lift-Up Motor
PC1-PC Paper Near-Empty Sensor Code Part Name
PC2-PC Set Sensor PWB-M Mechanical Control Board
PC3-PC CD Paper Size Sensor/2 PWB-A DU Duplex Control Board
PC4-PC CD Paper Size Sensor/1
M1DU Duplex Unit Switchback Motor
PC5-PC Door Set Sensor
M2DU Duplex Unit Transport Motor
PC6-PC Paper Empty Sensor
PCIDU Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor

Confidential
7.3 Connector Layout Drawing [15] [16] [1]

[14] [2]
Description [3]
[13]
Number of Pin 1 Possible to confirm by removing external cover.

1 Not Possible to confirm by removing external cover. [12]
[13] [14] [1]

[12] [11]
[2] [10]
[3] [4]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[6]
4039F5C508DA
[8]
Diagram Diagram
No. CN No. No. CN No.
Coordinates Coordinates
[1] CN14 K-2 [9] CN40 E-11
[7] [4]
[2] CN8 D-8 [10] CN18 E-12
[6] [3] CN6 E-4 ~ 5 [11] CN17 E-20
[5]
4039F5C507DA [4] CN3 E-21 [12] CN39 E-22
[5] CN43 E-11 [13] CN59 K-2
Diagram Diagram
No. CN No. No. CN No. [6] CN21 E-8 [14] CN38 E-12
Coordinates Coordinates
[1] CN32 E-13 ~ 14 [8] CN9 E-2 [7] CN4 E-8 [15] CN45 K-2
[2] CN30 U-6 [9] CN28 E-9 [8] CN5 D-8 [16] CN41 K-1
[3] CN31 U-6 [10] CN27 E-9

[4] CN56 E17 ~ 18 [11] CN22 E-9
[5] CN55 E-15 ~ 16 [12] CN29 E-10
[6] CN7 E-27 [13] CN13 0-18 ~ 19
[7] CN44 0-21 [14] CN19 0-19
APPENDIX Connector Layout Drawing 346

Confidential
7.4 Control Panel Special Operations

This printer provides the special functions listed in the following table by means of the special button operations.
Never disclose these special operations to the users. They are

intended to be used for product development and service.
7.4.1 Operation Method & Functions

Function Operation Method Explanation
Hexadecimal dump Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop] Printing is made in hexadecimal dump.
button.
Support mode Turn the power ON while holding down the [Down] button. [Support Menu] and [Printer Adjust Menu] are added to the Panel Menu. For more details, refer to
7.4.2 Special Menu (p349).
Initialization of EEPROM Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop], All information stored in the EEPROM of the controller is cleared.
[Job Cancel], and [Left] buttons. Note that information on the printer operational history such as total printed pages
is also erased.
Initialization of control panel settings Turn the power ON while holding down the [Job Cancel] All the settings made by the control panel are returned to their default.
button.
Forced erase of flash ROM A Turn the power ON while holding down the [Job Cancel], All information stored in the Flash ROM module, which is inserted into the DIMM slot A, is
[Right], [Up] and [Down] buttons. erased.
Update controller firmware Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop], The printer enters into the mode for updating the controller firmware.
[Job Cancel] and [Down] buttons.
Copy ROM module Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop], ROM module information is copied to another ROM module.
[Job Cancel] and [Right] buttons.
Maintenance mode Turn the power ON while holding down the [Right], [Left], [Support Menu], [Printer Adjust Menu] and [Maintenance Menu] are added to the Panel Menu.
[Up] and [Down] buttons. For more details, refer to 7.4.2 Special Menu (p349).
Update engine (mechanical) controller Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop], The printer enters into the mode for updating the engine controller firmware.
firmware [Job Cancel], [Up] and [Down] buttons.
RAM check of all sectors Turn the power ON while holding down the [Start/Stop], All sectors of RAM are checked when starting the printer. This function is executed when a
[Right], [Left] and [Up] buttons. controller-related error occurs, and checks if RAM has the reason of the error.
Reset of the CPU when a service call Turn the power ON while holding down the [Job Cancel], CPU is reset when this function is executed while a service request error is occurring.
occurs [Right], [Left], [Up] and [Down] buttons.
APPENDIX Control Panel Special Operations 347

Confidential
Function Operation Method Explanation

Display detailed information when a Press the [Job Cancel], [Right] and [Left] buttons when a While a service request error is occurring, the detailed information is displayed. However, this
service call occurs service call error occurs. function is not used for the normal service since the analysis of the displayed information is not
possible in the field of the service.
Print an error sheet Press the [Right] button after CPU reset when a service call When this operation is executed after resetting the CPU, information for analyzing errors is
error occurs. printed. However, this function is not used for the normal service since the analysis of the printed
information is not possible in the field of the service.
Update firmware with USB memory Turn the power ON while holding down the [Job Cancel] The firmware can be updated with USB memory stick.
stick and [Up] buttons.

Confidential
7.4.2 Special Menu Setting item Settings Explanation
The following special adjustment menu is provided. TR Normal -5 ~ 5 Sets the secondary transfer bias for each paper
TR Thick -5 ~ 5 type. Setting items with "Back" are for the back of
The underlined values are default values.
papers.
TR ExtraThk -5 ~ 5
SUPPORT MENU TR SuperThk -5 ~ 5
TR Envelope -5 ~ 5
Setting item Settings Explanation
TR Tmsprnc -5 ~ 5
Support Execute Prints the Support Status Sheet.
StatusSheet TR Card -5 ~ 5
LCD Backlight Auto On Off Sets the operation of LCD Backlight. TR NormalBack -5 ~ 5
Format Execute Formats the CompactFlash. TR ThickBack -5 ~ 5

CompactFlash TR ExtraThkBack -5 ~ 5
Format PS3 Execute TR SuperThkBack -5 ~ 5
CompactFlash TR Card Back -5 ~ 5
Delete All Execute Deletes all CompactFlash data. Max Density K -10 ~ 10 Sets the max density for each color. This setting is
CompactFlash executed to heighten a color. This setting is
Data Max Density C -10 ~ 10
available after executing calibration.
Max Density M -10 ~ 10
PRINTER ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION Max Density Y -10 ~ 10
Blur Margin K -5 ~ 5 Sets the blur margin for each color.
Blur Margin C -5 ~ 5
Highland 0~1 White spots may appear when using the printer in
a highland area. In such case, this setting is set to Blur Margin M -5 ~ 5
1. Therefore, developing bias is changed to Blur Margin Y -5 ~ 5
prevent some wrong. Definition Noise 0~3~7 This setting is not used for the service since it is a
Feed Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets Physical offset for the front of a page in the menu for development.
paper feeding direction. Gradation Noise 0~3~7 This setting is not used for the service since it is a
Scan Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets Physical offset for the front of a page in the menu for development.
scanning direction. Calibration Execute Executes the calibration of engine.
Feed Offset2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets Physical offset for the back of a page in the Color DiagnosisSht Execute Prints a sheet for the check of image quality.
paper feeding direction.
Scan Offset2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets Physical offset for the back of a page in the
scanning direction.

Confidential
MAINTENANCE MENU Setting item Settings Explanation

ScanOffset DupMP -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets the margin on the left edge of the back of a
Setting item Settings Explanation ScanOffset DupC1 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 paper for each Paper Feeder.
Maintenance Execute Prints Maintenance Status Sheet and Error Log ScanOffset DupC2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
StatusSht Sheet.
ScanOffset DupC3 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
Clear Error Log Execute Clears the saved error log to print it on Error Log
Sheet. ScanOffset DupC4 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
K Toner Admix Execute Supplies toner to the developing unit from the C Regist Feed -6 ~ 6 Corrects printing positions for each color.
toner cartridge forcibly. Execute this setting for C Regist Scan -6 ~ 6 Feed indicates the vertical direction, and
C Toner Admix Execute Scan indicates the horizontal direction.
the low density.
M Toner Admix Execute M Regist Feed -6 ~ 6
Y Toner Admix Execute M Regist Scan -6 ~ 6
Reset Mainte Counter Execute Resets the life counter of the maintenance unit. Y Regist Feed -6 ~ 6
Execute this setting after replacing the Y Regist Scan -6 ~ 6
maintenance unit.
Loop Fuser -2 ~ 2 Corrects the timing that the speed control of
Reset LC2 Counter Execute Resets the life counter of the feed roller (C2). fusing starts to prevent paper wrinkles that may
Execute this setting after replacing the feed occur when printing envelopes.
roller.
Temp1 Normal -10 ~ 10 Corrects the heater temperature of the fuser unit.
Reset LC3 Counter Execute Resets the life counter of the feed roller (C3). 1 indicates the heater of the heat roller, and
Temp2 Normal -10 ~ 10
Execute this setting after replacing the feed 2 indicates the heater of the press roller.
roller. Temp1 Thick -10 ~ 10
Reset LC4 Counter Execute Resets the life counter of the feed roller (C4). Temp2 Thick -10 ~ 10
Execute this setting after replacing the feed Temp1 ExtraThk -10 ~ 10
roller.
Temp2 ExtraThk -10 ~ 10
Feed Offset MP -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 Sets margins for each paper feeder. Feed
Temp1 SuperThk 0 ~ 10
Scan Offset MP -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 indicates the margin on the leading edge of the
paper and Scan indicates the margin on the left Temp2 SuperThk 0 ~ 10
Feed Offset C1 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 edge of the paper. Temp1 Envelope -10 ~ 10
Scan Offset C1 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
Temp2 Envelope -10 ~ 10
Feed Offset C2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
Temp1 Trnsprnc -10 ~ 10
Scan Offset C2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
Temp2 Trnsprnc -10 ~ 10
Feed Offset C3 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
Transfer 1st NN -5 ~ 5 Sets the primary transfer bias in NN
Scan Offset C3 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 environment. As the set value takes one step up/
Feed Offset C4 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 down, the transfer bias changes per 50 V.
*NN environment = Environment that
Scan Offset C4 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5
temperature and humidity are in standard value.

Confidential

USB Host 0~1 Selects whether to use USB Host I/F (1) or not to
use it (0). This setting is not required when
executing the update of the firmware with USB
memory.

Confidential
7.5 Information Sheet
7.5.1 Configuration Status Sheet

The information printed on the configuration status sheet are described in the table
below.
B
Location Item Explanation
A Hardware Configuration The information of following items
Serial Number
Memory
Available Memory
A
Main Version
MCU Version
Font Data Version
LUT Version
Printer Language
Interface
MAC Address
LAN Version
USB ID
Printer Configuration
B Color Calibration Prints the name and the date of the color calibration if
the color calibration is registered.
C Software Setting Prints various setting conditions of the printer.
Figure 7-1. Configuration Status Sheet
APPENDIX Information Sheet 352

Confidential
7.5.2 Supplies Status Sheet

The information printed on the supplies status sheet are described in the table below.

A Toner Cartridge The information of toner cartridge for each color
Remaining Level
Capacity
Part Order Number
Toner Kind
Pages printed using this supply
Initial Installation Date
New Replacement Frequency A
Used Replacement Frequency
B Other Consumables Information of the photoconductor unit and the waste
toner collector are printed.
C Periodic Replacement Information of the transfer unit and the fuser unit are
Parts printed.
Figure 7-2. Supplies Status Sheet

Confidential
7.5.3 Usage History Sheet

The information printed on the usage history sheet are described in the table below.

A Printer Information Serial Number
Printer Installation Date
Total Print Total Pages
Color Pages
System Log
B/W Pages
Power On Frequency
A
Sleep Frequency
Most Recent Print Date
Jam Frequency
B Categories based on the The number of pages according to the following
number of pages to print categories are printed.
Number of Prints by Paper Size
Number of Prints by Mode
Number of Prints by Paper Type
Number of Prints by Paper Path
B
Number of Prints by Printer Language
Number of Prints by Job Size
Number of Prints by Page Density
Figure 7-3. Usage History Sheet

Confidential
7.5.4 Support Status Sheet

The information printed on the support status sheet are described in the table below.

A Hardware Configuration The information of following items
Serial Number
USB ID
A
Device ID
B Support Menu The values set by the support menu are printed.
C Printer Adjust Menu The values set by the printer adjust menu are printed. B
Figure 7-4. Support Status Sheet

Confidential
7.5.5 Maintenance Status Sheet

The information printed on the maintenance status sheet are described in the table below.
Count
Item Explanation processing and Range Unit Count conditions Clear conditions
storage location
Printer Name Product name Controller --- --- --- ---
Serial Number Serial number memorized in the Controller --- --- --- ---
controller
Main Version Version for the controller firmware Controller --- --- --- ---
MCU Version Version for the engine controller Mechanical --- --- --- ---
firmware Controller
Printer install date Date and time when the printer is Controller --- --- --- ---
installed.
Total Counts Total Pages Total number of printed pages Controller 0 ~ 99,999,999 pages Printing EEPROM
initialization
Total Pages Total number of printed pages in A4 Mechanical 0 ~ 268,435,455 pages Printing ---
size Controller
Color Pages Total number of printed pages in Controller 0 ~ 99,999,999 pages Printing EEPROM
color initialization
B/W Pages Total number of printed pages in B/ Controller 0 ~ 99,999,999 pages Printing EEPROM
W initialization
Dummy Pages Number of dummy (empty) pages at Controller 0 ~ 99,999,999 pages Printing EEPROM
the time of duplex printing initialization
Can't Completed Pages Number of pages which have not Controller 0 ~ 99,999,999 pages Printing EEPROM
been printed due to the cause other initialization
than paper jam
Jam Pages Simplex Number of pages which are jammed Controller 0 ~ 999,999 pages Paper jam is EEPROM
at the time of simplex printing occurring initialization
Duplex Number of pages which are jammed Controller 0 ~ 999,999 pages Paper jam is EEPROM
at the time of duplex printing occurring initialization
Total Total number of pages which are Controller 0 ~ 999,999 pages Paper jam is EEPROM
jammed occurring initialization

Confidential
Count
storage location
Toner Cartridge K% Rate of the K toner consumption Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New K toner detected
Controller
Capacity Amount of the K toner charging Mechanical 21,000 Sheets (Fixed value) ---
(pages) Controller
Changes 21K Number of replacements of the 21K Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Detecting new EEPROM
toner K(21K) toner initialization
N Number of replacements of the non- Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Canceling the EEPROM
genuine toner non-genuine initialization
toner error
C% Rate of the C toner consumption Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New C toner detected
Controller
Capacity Amount of the C toner charging Mechanical 14,000 Sheets (Fixed value) ---
(pages) Controller
toner C(14K) toner initialization
toner error
M% Rate of the M toner consumption Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New M toner detected
Controller
Capacity Amount of the M toner charging Mechanical 14,000 Sheets (Fixed value) ---
(pages) Controller
toner M(14K) toner initialization
toner error
Y% Rate of the Y toner consumption Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New Y toner detected
Controller
Capacity Amount of the Y toner charging Mechanical 14,000 Sheets (Fixed value) ---
(pages) Controller
toner Y(14K) toner initialization

Confidential
Count
storage location
Toner Cartridge N Number of replacements of the non- Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Canceling the EEPROM
toner error
Photoconductor Unit K% Rate of the K photoconductor unit Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New K
consumption Controller photoconductor
detected
Changes Number of replacements of the K Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Detecting new K EEPROM
photoconductor unit photoconductor initialization
unit
C% Rate of the C photoconductor unit Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New C
detected
Changes Number of replacements of the C Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Detecting new C EEPROM
unit
M% Rate of the M photoconductor unit Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New M photoconductor
consumption Controller detected
Changes Number of replacements of the M Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Detecting new M EEPROM
unit
Y% Rate of the Y photoconductor unit Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New Y
detected
Changes Number of replacements of the Y Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Detecting new Y EEPROM
unit
Fuser Unit % Rate of the fuser unit consumption Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New fuser unit
Controller detected
Count Counters for using the fuser unit Mechanical 0 ~ 268,435,455 Pages Printing New fuser unit
Controller detected
Changes Number of replacements of the fuser Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Clearing the EEPROM
unit counter initialization

Confidential
Count
storage location
Transfer Unit % Rate of the transfer unit Mechanical 0 ~ 127 % Printing New transfer unit
consumption Controller detected
Count Counters for using the transfer unit Mechanical 0 ~ 268,435,455 Pages Printing New transfer unit
Controller detected
Changes Number of replacements of the Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Clearing the EEPROM
transfer unit counter initialization
Feed Roller % Rate of the paper feed roller (feed Controller 0 ~ 500 % Printing Counter reset/
MP/C1/C2/C3/C4 roller) consumption EEPROM
initialization
Count Counters for using the paper feed Controller 0 ~ 1,000,000 Sheets Printing Counter reset/
roller (feed roller) EEPROM
initialization
Changes Number of replacements of the Controller 0 ~ 255 Times Resetting the EEPROM
paper feed roller (feed roller) counter initialization
Feed Offset MP/C1/C2/C3/C4 Value set by the maintenance menu Controller -3.5 ~ 3.5 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Scan Offset MP/C1/C2/C3/C4 Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -3.5 ~ 3.5 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
ScanOffset Dup MP/C1/C2/C3/C4 Value set by the maintenance menu Controller -3.5 ~ 3.5 --- (Set value) (Setting)
C Regist Feed Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
C Regist Scan Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
M Regist Feed Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
M Regist Scan Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Y Regist Feed Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Y Regist Scan Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -6 ~ 6 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Registration Adjusted value for skew of the PH Mechanical -8191 ~ 8192 --- (Adjusted value) ---
unit Controller (Theoretical value)
Loop Fuser Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -2 ~ 2 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller

Confidential
Count
storage location
Temp1 Normal/Thick/ExtraThk/ Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -10 ~ 10 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Envelope/Transprnc Controller
SuperThk Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical 0 ~ 10 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Temp2 Normal/Thick/ExtraThk/ Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -10 ~ 10 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Envelope/Transprnc Controller
SuperThk Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical 0 ~ 10 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Transfer 1ST NN Value set by the maintenance menu Mechanical -5 ~ 5 --- (Set value) (Setting)
Controller
Last Pages Dots K/C/M/Y Number of dots used in the last Controller 0 ~ 2,147,483,647 --- Printing EEPROM
printed page (each color) initialization
Last Job Dots K/C/M/Y Number of dots used for the last Controller 0 ~ 2,147,483,647 --- Printing EEPROM
completed job (each color) initialization
Life Dots K/C/M/Y Number of life dots of toner for each Controller 0 ~ 2,147,483,647 --- Printing EEPROM
color initialization
Total Dots/1%[dots] K/C/M/Y Average number of dots when using Controller 0 ~ 2,147,483,647 --- Printing EEPROM
1% of toner for each color initialization

Confidential
Count
storage location
Toner Cartridge Current K, C, M, Y G/N Type of toner which is currently Controller G, N --- Replacing toner EEPROM
Tracking installed (G: genuine toner, N: not initialization
genuine toner)
Current K, C, M, Y Number of printed pages of toner for Controller 0 ~ 999,999 --- Printing EEPROM
each color which is currently initialization
installed
Previous K, C, M, Y G/N Type of toner which was installed Controller G, N --- Replacing toner EEPROM
prior to the current one (G: genuine initialization
toner, N: not genuine toner)
Previous K, C, M, Y Number of printed pages of toner for Controller 0 ~ 999,999 --- Printing EEPROM
each color which was installed prior initialization
to the current one
Before Previous K, C, M, Y Type of toner which was installed Controller G, N --- Replacing toner EEPROM
G/N two toners before the current one initialization
(G: genuine toner, N: not genuine
toner)
Before Previous K, C, M, Y Number of printed pages of toner for Controller 0 ~ 999,999 --- Printing EEPROM
each color which was installed two initialization
toners before the current one.

Confidential
Figure 7-5. Maintenance Status Sheet

Confidential
7.5.6 Error Log Sheet

The information printed on the error log sheet are described in the table below.
Item Explanation
Printer Name Product name
Serial Number Serial number memorized in the controller
Main Version Version for the controller firmware
MCU Version Version for the engine controller firmware
Printer install date Date and time when the printer is installed
Error Log No Number for the error index
Panel Message Error message indicated on the panel
Code Status code for EJL
SubCode Jam code (8-digit hexadecimal)
Total pages Total number of printed pages when an error is generated
Information Paper size and type when paper jam is generated, they are
separated with a space. Refer to the following table for paper
types.
Generated Date and time when an error is generated.
Released Date and time when an error is released.
Code Paper Type Code Paper Type

0 Normal paper 8 Envelope
1 Transparency 16 Normal paper (2nd)
2 Thick paper 2 18 Thick paper 2 (2nd)
3 Thick paper 3 19 Thick paper 3 (2nd)
4 Thick paper 1, Label 20 Thick paper 1 (2nd)
6 Postcard 22 Postcard (2nd)
7 Transparency 2 24 Envelope (2nd)
Figure 7-6. Error Log Sheet

Confidential
7.6 Exploded Diagram / Parts List

MAIN UNIT
Ref. No Part Name Name in this manual

01-001 TOP COVER Exit Tray
01-002 COVER Exit Tray Connector protective
cover
01-003 TOP COVER Upper Cover
01-004 RIGHT COVER Front Right Cover
01-007 CLEANING PAD ---
01-009 BAND ---
01-012 MAGNET ---
01-015 CLEANING MATERIAL ---
01-018 CONTROL PANEL ---
01-019 LEFT COVER Front Left Cover
01-020 LEFT COVER Rear Left Cover
01-021 SHOULDER SCREW ---
01-023 REAR COVER Rear Cover
01-024 RIGHT COVER Right Rear COver
01-027 COVER ASSY Front Door
01-028 LABEL,PAPER SIZE ---
01-031 LABEL,UNIT NAME ---
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram / Parts List 364

Confidential
CA15-CASE-011 Only numbered Service Parts are available.
a
01-023
d 01-001 01-028
01-024
01-002
01-031
01-003
01-004
d b
01-018
a
01-027
b 01-009
01-012
01-021 b b
b 01-007
01-021
d
b
01-012
01-015
01-020
b
01-019 c
FOR LP-S7500/EPSON AcuLaser C9200N NO.01 Rev.01 CA15


02-002 PROTECTION ---
02-004 SWITCH Primary Interlock Switch (S2)
02-006 COVER ---
02-008 SCREW ---
02-009 CAP ---
02-011 WIRE HARNESS ---
02-012 RUBBER FOOT ---
02-014 SEAL ---

Confidential
CA15-MECH-011 Only numbered Service Parts are available.
02-002
02-002
02-014
02-006
02-004
a S2
02-012
b
02-012 02-008 (x3pcs)
b
02-008 (x3pcs)
02-009
02-011


03-001 MICRO-SWITCH Right Door Switch (S5)
03-002 SCREW ---
03-003 FRONT COVER SW ASSY ---
03-004 WIRE HARNESS ASSY ---
03-005 SWITCH Main Power Switch (S1)
03-007 TORSION SPRING ---
03-009 COVER Connector Protective Cover
03-011 INNER COVER ASSY Front Cover

Confidential
03-006
03-007
03-011
03-001
S5
a
03-002 (x2pcs)
03-003
c
03-005
b
S1 S3
03-004
03-009


04-005 HARNESS ASSY ---
04-007 PHOTO INTERRUPTER ---
04-008 ACTUATOR ---
04-009 SOLID STATE SWITCH ---
04-010 ACTUATOR ---
04-011 TENSION SPRING ---
04-012 HOLDER ---
04-013 PWB-I Standard cassette Paper Size Board
(PWB-I)
04-014 LEVER ---
04-018 PHOTO INTERRUPTER ---
04-019 LEVER ---
04-021 SEAL ---
04-022 COVER ---
04-023 SIZE DETECTING PWB ASSY Standard cassette Paper Size Board
Assy
04-024 LEFT COVER LOWER ASSY ---
04-025 GUIDE (MPC) ---
04-026 BRACKET ---
04-027 STEP SCREW ---

Confidential
04-021
04-022
04-019 g 04-027
04-026
b
PC11
PC12
04-018
04-018 04-025
04-023
c
f
c
04-012 b
PWB-I
04-013
04-004
04-014
04-024
a
04-005
c 04-007
04-011
PC10
04-010 PC9
04-009
d
d e
04-008


05-001 TRAY Tray Extension
05-002 COVER ---
05-006 ACTUATOR ---
05-007 PHOTO INTERRUPTER MP tray Paper Empty Sensor
(PC13)
05-008 TRAY ---
05-009 LABEL CAUTION ---
05-010 COVER MP tray Left Cover
05-011 HOLD PLATE ---
05-014 GUIDE ---
05-015 COVER MP tray Right Cover
05-016 SCREW ---
05-018 GEAR 13/18T ---
05-019 LIFTING PLATE ---
05-020 FRICTION SHEET ---
05-021 BRAKE ---
05-022 HOLDER ---
05-023 PAPER GUIDE R ASSY ---
05-024 PAPER GUIDE F ASSY ---
05-027 CUSHION ---
05-028 MANUAL FEED TRAY UNIT Multi Bypass Unit

Confidential
05-001
05-023
b
05-022
05-016 05-002
05-024
05-021
05-020 a
a
05-003
05-019
05-015 05-018
a
a PC13
05-007
05-006
05-027
a 05-008
05-014 05-011 05-009
b b
05-027
c
05-028
B(CA15-MECH-061)
c A(CA15-MECH-041)
05-010


06-001 GUIDE ---
06-002 ROLLER ASSY Separation Roller
06-003 PAPER GUIDE ASSY ---
06-004 ROLLER ASSY ---
06-005 EARTH PLATE ---
06-007 LEVER ---

Confidential
06-001
06-004
06-002
a
R2
06-007
b
06-005
a A
06-003
a


07-001 CLUTCH ASSY ---
07-003 BUSHING ---
07-004 GEAR 30T ---
07-005 GEAR 30T ---
07-006 BUSHING ---
07-007 CAM ---
07-008 ROLLER ---
07-009 STOP RING ---
07-011 GEAR 25T ---
07-012 CLUTCH MP tray Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
07-013 SOLENOID ---
07-016 PHOTO INTERRUPTER MP tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC14)
07-017 BUSHING ---
07-018 SHIELD PLATE ---

Confidential
07-016
PC14
a
07-017
f 07-018
b 07-001
f
B
SL2 b
07-003
07-013
f c 07-004
07-005
07-012
CL5 g 07-007
07-006
b
d
07-011
07-003
07-009
07-008 e


08-001 PWB ASSY PH Interface Board (PWB-I)
08-002 CONNECTOR ASSY Photoconductor Unit Contact Assy
08-005 PU LIFT REAR ASSY ---
08-006 PU LIFT FRONT ASSY Photoconductor Unit Roll Assy
08-007 POLYESTER FILM ---

Confidential
c
c
08-005 (x4pcs) a
c
08-001
PWB-D 08-006 (x4pcs)

c
08-007
08-007
08-007
b
08-002
08-002
08-007 08-002
08-004
08-002
b
c
b
c
b b
c c


09-001 PLATE SPRING Stopper
09-007 SCREW ---
09-008 PIN ---
09-009 PRESSURE SPRING ---
09-014 GEAR 30T ---
09-020 SKEW ADJUSTMENT ASSY ---
09-021 P/H ASSY PH Unit

Confidential
09-021
09-001
09-001
09-007
09-001
09-007
09-001
a 09-007
a
b 09-020
(x4pcs)
09-014
(x4pcs) c
a a
09-007 (x4pcs)
a
c
09-007
a
09-009 (x4pcs) 09-008 (x4pcs)

09-007 (x4pcs)
09-007 (x4pcs)
09-007 (x4pcs)


10-001 RAIL ---
10-003 PAWL Guide
10-004 LABEL K ---
10-005 LABEL C ---
10-006 LABEL M ---
10-007 LABEL Y ---
10-009 RAIL ---
10-010 RAIL ---
10-011 RAIL ---
10-013 STIRRING MEMBER ---
10-014 SEAL ---
10-016 GUIDE ASSY ---
10-017 STIRRING MEMBER ---
10-019 SEAL(T/C SEAL) ---

Confidential
b
10-009
10-010
10-001
10-010
10-014 (x3pcs)
10-013 (x3pcs) a
a
10-011 10-003
10-016 (x3pcs) 10-004

10-005
10-004
10-005
10-006
10-006
10-019 10-007
10-014 10-007
a 10-003
10-017
10-008 10-003
10-003
10-016


11-002 IU CONTACT PLATE ASSY ---
11-003 REAR COVER Rear Handle Assy Protect Cover
11-004 SCREW ---
11-005 HOLDER ---
11-006 COVER ---
11-007 REAR COVER ---
11-010 HV TRANSFORMER High Voltage Unit (HV1)
11-011 CONTACT ASSY Conductive Spring Assy
11-012 CONTACT B ASSY ---

Confidential
11-010
a
c
HV1
11-002
11-012 (x3pcs)
b
11-011
a
11-004
11-003
11-011
11-011
11-011
c 11-005 b
11-004
11-006 b
11-007


12-006 RAIL ---
12-007 LABEL K ---
12-008 LABEL C ---
12-009 LABEL M ---
12-010 LABEL Y ---
12-011 REINFORCE PLATE ---
12-017 SEAL ---
12-020 REINFORCE PLATE ---
12-022 ERASER YMC ASSY ---
12-023 ERASER K ASSY ---
12-025 PIPE YMC ASSY ---
12-026 SEAL(E) ---
12-027 SEAL(IU RAIL UNDER) ---
12-028 SEAL(IU RAIL BACK) ---

Confidential
LA1
12-022 12-022
12-029 LA2 12-023
12-022
12-030 LA3
f LA4
12-027
12-020
12-017 (x4pcs)
f 12-028 12-007
f
12-008
c
12-026
b
f 12-006 12-009
12-011
12-010
b
a
12-025 (x3pcs) e d
b
d
b b
b
c


13-003 CAP ---
13-008 BRASHLESS MOTOR Main Motor (M1)/Color Developing
Motor (M3)
13-009 BRASHLESS MOTOR Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
13-010 HOPPER DRIVE ASSY Hopper Drive Assy
13-011 DEVELOP DRIVE ASSY Transfer Drive Assy
13-014 FAN MOTOR ---
13-015 SCREW ---

Confidential
a
c
13-014
13-010
b 13-015 (x2pcs)
b
13-009
c a
a
M1 13-011
b
M2 13-008
13-008
13-003
13-007
b
M3
a
b c


14-004 SCREW ---
14-010 SCREW ---
14-017 SEAL ---
14-024 TRANSFER KIT ---
14-025 SWITCH ASSY 1st Image Transfer Pressure/
Retraction Position Sensor Unit

Confidential
14-025 14-024
14-004
14-004
14-007
d a
14-010
d
14-020 14-010
14-017
14-017
14-010
14-004
14-004
b
14-010


15-002 ROLLER ---
15-006 SOLID STATE SWITCH OHP Sensor (PC4)
15-010 ROLLER ---
15-016 BUSHING ---
15-017 GEAR 20T ---
15-018 GEAR 14T ---
15-020 RESISTOR ---
15-022 ACTUATOR ---
15-023 PRISM ---
15-026 PHOTO SENSING ELEMENT IDC Sensor (1, 2)
15-028 PHOTO INTERRUPUTER ---
15-031 HUMIDITY CONVERTION EL. Temperature/Humidity Sensor
(SE3)
15-033 CLUTCH ---
15-034 SEAL ---
15-035 COVER ---
15-036 SEAL ---
15-037 HANDLE ASSY ---
15-038 VERT.TRANSFER UNIT Vertical Transport Assy

Confidential
15-037
a
15-038
15-035
15-034
CL1
15-016
c b
c
15-035 15-002
15-033 c
15-036
15-006
15-016
a
15-034
SE2 15-010
d
15-036
15-026
SE3
15-031 PC4
15-032
b 15-023
15-022 15-013
15-029
b R3
b
PC1
15-016
d SE1 15-020
15-028
15-026 b 15-017
c
15-016
15-018 c


16-001 COVER ---
16-002 COVER ---
16-003 CAM ---
16-005 HOLDER ---
16-006 SCREW ---
16-007 LEVER ---
16-016 STOPPER ---
16-017 LABEL,PAPER CAUTION,MP;B ---
16-018 LABEL,COVER A ---
16-019 DOOR ASSY ---
16-020 ROLLER ASSY 2nd Transfer Unit (Roller)

Confidential
16-016
16-015 16-002
16-019
16-017
16-001
16-015
c
16-005
16-003
16-006 a
a 16-018
16-009
16-005 16-003
16-009
a
16-007 16-006
16-020


17-001 CLUTCH Standard cassette Paper Feed Clutch
(CL2)
17-002 CLUTCH Developing Clutch (CL4)
17-004 TRANSFER DRIVE ASSY ---

Confidential
17-004
a
17-001
CL2
CL4
17-002


18-002 GEAR 18T ---
18-003 GEAR 18T ---
18-004 GEAR 18/30T ---
18-005 BUSHING ---
18-009 SCREW ---
18-012 GEAR 16T ---
18-013 BUSHING ---
18-014 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8)
18-017 GEAR 32/30T ---
18-018 GEAR 32T ---
18-021 PIPE ASSY ---

Confidential
CA15-MECH-171 a
Only numbered Service Parts are available.
18-021
18-021
18-002
18-004
18-005
18-003
18-021
18-021 18-009
18-005
d 18-017
18-018
c
d
c 18-012
e
18-013
18-004
PC8
18-014


19-001 TONER PIPE ---
19-004 SCREW ---

Confidential
19-001
19-004


20-001 FUSING UNIT 230V Fusing Unit

Confidential
20-001
20-004


21-002 GEAR 18T ---
21-003 GEAR 18T ---
21-004 GEAR 37T ---
21-005 GEAR 81/17T ---
21-006 SCREW ---
21-007 HOLDER ---
21-008 BUSHING ---
21-015 GEAR 16T ---
21-016 GEAR 22T ---
21-019 GEAR 20T ---
21-020 CLUTCH 1st Image Transfer Pressure/
21-021 GEAR 41T ---
21-023 PULSE MOTOR Fusing Drive Motor (M4)

Confidential
M4
b
21-008
21-023
b 21-004
21-008
b 21-003 21-006
a
21-008 a
21-007
d 21-002
21-005
21-019
CL3
21-008
21-021
a
21-020
21-008 b
21-006
21-006
b
b
b
21-008 21-008
21-008 b
21-016 21-015


22-002 NEUTRALIZING BRUSH ---
22-003 SCREW ---
22-004 FAN MOTOR Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2 (M11)
22-005 GUIDE ---
22-006 EARTH GROUND ---
22-012 COVER ---
22-016 PAPER EXIT COVER ASSY Upper Fusing Cover

Confidential
22-012 22-016
22-010
22-003
22-004
22-003
22-002
M11
22-005
a
a
b
22-006


23-001 GUIDE ---
23-003 COLLAR ---
23-004 EARTH GROUND ---
23-006 BUSHING ---
23-007 ROLLER ---
23-008 ROLL ---
23-009 SHAFT ---
23-010 BRACKET ---
23-011 DUCT ---
23-012 GEAR 16T ---
23-013 PAPER EXIT DRIVE ASSY ---

Confidential
23-012
23-013
23-001
b
23-003
23-002 d
23-006
23-003
d 23-003
23-002 d 23-003
23-004
23-003
d
23-007 d
c a
a
23-008
23-008
a
23-008
23-006 b
23-008
23-009
23-010
23-011


24-001 FUN MOTOR Cooling Fan Motor /1 (M12)
24-009 LEFT COVER ---
24-012 FAN MOTOR Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14)
24-019 POWER CABLE ---

Confidential
24-001 a
M13
M12 b
b
d 24-001
24-012
M14
c
24-019 (Only for EHK)
b
b
24-007
24-009
See Diagram NO.14
FOR EPSON AcuLaser C9200N NO.24 Rev.01 CA15


25-001 SCREW ---
25-004 SCREW ---
25-009 POWER SUPPLY DC Power Supply (PU1)
25-010 FAN MOTOR Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor
(M14)
25-015 HARNESS ---
25-020 PWB ASSY Mechanical Control Board (PWB-
M)
25-025 MAIN BODY CONTROL
---
HARNESS
25-027 PWB-R RTC Board (PWB-R)
25-028 COVER,TYPE-B ---
25-030 FERRITE CORE ---
25-031 BOARD ASSY,MAIN Controller Board (PWB-P)
25-033 BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY ---
25-100 GUIDE RAIL ---
25-101 GROUND PLATE ---

Confidential
CA15-ELEC-011A a Only numbered Service Parts are available.
e
25-028 25-101
f 25-001 (x2pcs)
f 25-100
25-015 e
g
25-027
25-025
a
25-018 25-020
c PWB-R
25-019 c
25-031
25-033 a
c 25-030
b
25-021
PWB-M
PWB-MAIN b
25-012
a
25-004
M8
d
b
25-022
25-010 25-004
PU1
25-009
c
FOR EPSON AcuLaser C9200N NO.25 Rev.01 CA15


26-004 REGULATING PLATE ---
26-005 LABEL,MPC SCALE;CD ---
26-007 LEVER ---
26-008 GUIDE ---
26-009 GUIDE ---
26-010 LOCK LEVER ---
26-017 COVER ---
26-018 LABEL,C1 ---
26-019 HANDLE ---
26-020 COVER ---
26-021 SCREW ---
26-022 LEVER ---
26-024 SPACER ---
26-025 RACK ---
26-026 GEAR 20T ---
26-029 SPACER ---
26-030 SPACER ---
26-033 LABEL ---
26-034 MULTIPURPOSE CASSETTE ---
26-035 REGULATING PLATE R ASSY ---

Confidential
26-031 26-030
26-001
26-002 26-008
26-034
26-006
26-004 26-009
27-C
a
26-005 26-007
b
26-026
26-029 26-010
a
26-025 26-011
26-025
a 26-017
d 26-018
26-035
26-024 c 26-033
26-019
d
e
26-022 26-021 26-020
b


27-005 WASHER ---
27-007 ROLLER Feed Roller
27-009 STOP RING ---
27-010 ROLLER ASSY Separation Roller
27-011 BUSHING ---
27-014 PIN ---
27-015 PAWL ---

Confidential
27-015
a
27-014
27-005
b
27-007
c
27-011
27-010
27-009
d
27-018
27-011
27-009


28-001 SADDLE ---
28-002 SADDLE ---
28-003 SADDLE ---
28-004 SADDLE ---
28-005 BUSHING ---
28-006 CORD CLAMP ---
28-007 CLAMP ---
28-008 SADDLE ---
28-009 HOLDER ---
28-010 HOLDER ---
28-011 BAND ---
28-012 INSULATING MEMBER ---

Confidential
CA15-TOOL-011A Only numbered Service Parts are available.
28-001 (x9pcs) 28-002 (x6pcs) 28-003 (x33pcs) 28-004 (x30pcs)
13.2 5.2 7.3

9.2
11.5 16 11.5 4.8
28-005 11.1 28-007 28-008 (x6pcs)

10 5
1.3
8.5
2.4
13.4 17.5
19.9 11.2
28-006 (x3pcs)
28-009 (x5pcs) 28-010 28-011 (x3pcs) 28-012(x3pcs)
31.4 46.1
L=104
33 18
18 25.8
28-013
FOR EPSON Aculaser C9200N NO.28 Rev.01 CA15

OPTIONAL CASSETTE UNIT

01-001 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-
PC)/Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-
PC)
01-003 ACTUATOR ---
01-004 BUSHING ---
01-005 PHOTO INTERRUPUTER Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC)/Paper
Empty Sensor (PC6-PC)/Lift-Up
Sensor (PC7-PC)
01-006 GEAR 30T ---
01-007 CLUTCH ---
01-008 ROLLER ---
01-009 HOLDER ---
01-010 GUIDE ---
01-011 GEAR 32T ---
01-012 GEAR 29T ---
01-013 PIN ---
01-016 BUSHING ---
01-017 LEVER ---
01-021 GEAR 32T ---
01-024 PAPER FEEDER ASSY ---

Confidential
C802-OPTI-208 Only numbered Service Parts are available.
b
01-005 c
PC5-PC
01-021
b 01-001
a
01-020
PC8-PC
c
c
01-004
a e
PC9-PC
01-001
01-003
01-018
01-013 01-004
PC7-PC
01-017 a b
01-016
01-005
01-006
01-024 01-015 01-005
a 01-007 PC6-PC
01-013 a
a c
01-004 01-008
01-009
A(C802-OPTI-209) 01-012
e d
B(C802-OPTI-210) 01-011 a 01-004
01-007 01-004
a
01-010 01-008
01-010
FOR LPA3CZ1CU8/500-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT A3 NO.1 Rev.01


02-001 GUIDE ---
02-002 GUIDE ---
02-009 SEPARATION ROLLER ASSY Separation Roller

Confidential
02-010 a
A(C802-OPTI-208)
f 02-001
02-009
e
b
c 02-002
c b


03-001 DOOR ---
03-004 ROLL ---
03-005 HANDLE ---
03-006 LEVER ---
03-007 SCREW ---
03-009 GUIDE PLATE ---
03-011 BUSHING ---
03-012 ROLLER ---
03-013 GEAR 19/40T ---
03-014 GEAR 19/32T ---
03-015 GEAR 20T ---
03-017 GEAR 22T ---
03-019 LEVER ---

Confidential
03-001
03-019
03-004
03-007 03-004
03-017
g 03-004
d b 03-004
03-011
03-005
h
e 03-007
03-014
f b
f 03-015
f b 03-007
c 03-006
03-014 03-009
03-013
03-012
03-011
B(C802-OPTI-208)
d


04-001 SCREW ---
04-003 COVER ---
04-008 COVER ---
04-009 HOLDER ---
04-014 COVER ---

Confidential
a 04-001 (x2pcs)
04-003
a
a 04-001 04-001 (x2pcs)

04-016
04-001
a
a a 04-008 a
04-001
a 04-001 (x2pcs)
04-001 (x2pcs)
a 04-001 (x2pcs)
04-001 (x2pcs) a
04-009
a 04-015 b a
c
04-001 (x2pcs)
a a a
d
04-015
b c
a
04-012
b
04-014
04-012
a b
a
04-001 (x2pcs) 04-001 (x2pcs)


05-001 PULSE MOTOR Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)/Vertical
Transport Motor (M2-PC)
05-003 GEAR 27T ---
05-006 PHOTO INTERRUPUTER Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC1-
PC)/Set Sensor (PC2-PC)/CD Paper
Size Sensor 2 (PC3-PC)/CD Paper
Size Sensor 1 (PC4-PC)
05-009 BRACKET ---
05-012 MAGNET MOTOR Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
05-013 PWB-I Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)
05-016 SCREW ---
05-021 PWB ASSY Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
05-022 LEVER ---

Confidential
05-026 05-001
05-001
M2-PC
M1-PC
a
05-025
05-006
b
f
M3-PC
PC3-PC 05-012
05-020
05-006
PC4-PC PC2-PC b c
05-003 05-003 c
05-006 05-006
d
05-021
e 05-022
05-004
PWB-I-PC
e d
PC1-PC
PWB-Z-PC
05-016 05-004
d
05-018
05-013 a
05-009
05-017 05-016 d d


06-001 GUIDE ---
06-002 LABEL CARRYING CAPACITY ---
06-003 STOPPER ---
06-006 GEAR 14T ---
06-009 KNOB ---
06-010 LEVER ---
06-015 CASSETTE ASSY ---
06-017 HANDLE ---
06-018 LABEL,PAPER CAUTION,CST;B ---
06-021 LEVER ---
06-022 STOPPER ---
06-025 ACTUATOR ---
06-034 BUSHING ---
06-036 FRONT COVER ASSY ---
06-041 REGURATION COVER ASSY ---
06-042 LEVER ---
06-043 FRICTION BOARD ---
06-047 CASSETTE UNIT ---

Confidential
06-001 06-003
06-047 06-002 06-004 06-001
06-008
06-006 06-009
a 06-003 e
06-041
06-025 06-015
06-043
06-031 06-007 06-010
a
06-011
c
b
06-014
06-034
g
e
a 06-042
a 06-036
06-022 06-046
h
h 06-018
06-021 f
a
a
f
06-017


07-001 CORD CLAMP ---
07-002 SADDLE ---
07-003 SADDLE ---
07-004 SADDLE ---
07-005 SADDLE ---
07-006 HOLDER ---
07-007 SADDLE ---
07-008 BAND ---

Confidential
10 5 07-002 (x6pcs) 07-003 (x5pcs) 07-004 (x2pcs)
1.3
2.4 7.3
5.2 9.2
11.5 4.8 11.5

07-001 (x8pcs)
07-005 (x6pcs)
07-007 07-008
07-006 (x3pcs) 14.2
31.4
8.5
L=110
11.2 18 11.4


08-002 STOP PLATE ---
08-003 LABEL,PAPER SIZE ---
08-004 LABEL,CASSETTE NAME ---
08-005 COVER ASSY ---

Confidential
08-001 08-001 08-001 08-001
08-005
08-002 08-002 08-002 08-002
08-003 08-004

DUPLEX NIT

01-001 STOPPER ---
01-003 LEVER ---
01-004 LABEL,COVER D ---
01-005 PLATE SPRING ---
01-006 DOOR ---
01-009 COVER ---
01-011 WASHER ---
01-015 ACTUATOR ---
01-017 COVER Duplex Unit Rear Cover
01-021 LABEL,PAPER
---
CAUTION,DUPLEX

Confidential
01-003
01-001
01-017
a
01-004
01-005
01-005
01-007 01-006
01-015
01-007
01-011
a 01-021
01-015 01-011 01-009
a
a
FOR LPA3CRU8/DUPLEX UNIT NO.1 Rev.01


02-001 ROLLER ---
02-002 ROLL ---
02-003 ROLLER ---
02-004 BUSHING ---
02-005 TIMING BELT 328L ---
02-006 PULLEY 22T ---
02-008 ROLLER ---
02-013 GEAR 25/33T ---
02-014 GEAR 20/22T ---
02-017 PULSE MOTOR Duplex Unit Switchback Motor
(M2DU)
02-021 PWB-A Duplex Unit Control Board (PWB-
A DU)
02-025 WIRE ---

Confidential
f
e
02-025 c 02-001
a
d
02-029
02-002
02-022 f 02-004
e
02-002
02-021
02-014
PWB-A DU a
02-002 02-003
M2 DU 02-004
02-013 02-002
02-017 a
g
02-004
e a
02-012
g
02-005
a 02-004
02-004 02-006
b
02-008
02-004
02-002
02-006
b
02-002


03-001 PHOTO INTERRUPTER Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor
(PCIDU)
03-003 PULSE MOTOR Switchback Motor (M1DU)
03-005 GEAR 18T ---
03-006 GEAR 14T ---
03-010 HOOK ---
03-016 GEAR 17/30T ---
03-017 SADDLE ---
03-018 COVER ---

Confidential
03-013
a
03-001
a
03-016
b
c PC1 DU
03-010
M1 DU
03-007
03-005
03-006
03-003
03-017 03-018
7.3
4.8

ALC9200N - Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ALC9200N - Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SERVICE MANUAL

A3 Color Laser Printer

EPSON AcuLaser C9200N

Copyright SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2008.

This manual consists of the following seven chapters:

Symbols Used in this Manual Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or Front Door SW

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

Safety System Wiring Schematic

Safety Equipment Main Power Switch Sleep Relay Heater Relay

Disassembling and adjustment procedures not specified herein

Do not use extension cords or power adapters to plug multiple

After replacing the Fuser Unit or any other parts to which AC

Revision Date of Issue Description

1.1 Product Specifications Item Specification

*1 : Conditions: A4, plain paper, continuous printing

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 12

EXTERNAL VIEW AND PART NAMES

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 13

Table 1-3. Part Names

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 14

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

NOTE 1 : Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.

Main Unit 49.5 kg

Optional Cassette 14.8 kg

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 15

INSTALLATION SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Figure 1-6. Installation Space Requirements

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 16

1.1.2 Paper Specifications

Table 1-4. Supported Papers

* : Plain Paper: FX-P (64g/m2), Epson color laser paper (82g/m2)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 17

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 18

PRINTABLE AREA ENVELOPE ORIENTATION

Area excluding 4.2 mm margins on all four edges

Area excluding 5 mm margins on all four edges

Table 1-5. Guaranteed Print Area

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 19

1.1.3 Replacement Parts

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 20

1.1.4 Controller Specifications EXTERNAL INTERFACES

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Specifications 21

1.2 List of Printer Messages Table 1-6. List of Printer Messages

X: Off ESC/Page Font Sample X

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 22

Collate Disabled X Write Error ROM A O

Replace Maintenance Unit 2 Replace Toner uuuu*5 O

Maintenance Unit Needed Soon X Replace Transfer Unit 2

Feed Roller C2 Needed Soon X Replace Maintenance Unit 2

Feed Roller C3 Needed Soon X Replace Feed Roller C2 2

Feed Roller C4 Needed Soon X Replace Feed Roller C3 2

Non-Genuine Toner Cartridge X Replace Feed Roller C4 2

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 23

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 24

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 25

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 26

Table 1-7. Error Message and Troubleshooting

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 27

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 28

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 29

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION List of Printer Messages 30